From 7c390d3d29fcbe5f23638ba1a3143e9da3a4b52a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Tue, 21 Jan 2020 21:42:42 +0000 Subject: hyperref (21jan20) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@53481 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt | 10 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/README.md | 35 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/backref.pdf | Bin 127581 -> 133242 bytes Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/hyperref.pdf | Bin 2463277 -> 2314278 bytes Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manifest.txt | 38 - Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.css | 85 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.html | 3069 +++++++++++--------- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.pdf | Bin 286698 -> 296781 bytes Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual2.html | 6 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual3.html | 10 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual4.html | 10 +- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual7.html | 18 + Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/nameref.pdf | Bin 125513 -> 118154 bytes Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/options.pdf | Bin 30252 -> 0 bytes .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/backref.dtx | 6 +- .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/bmhydoc.sty | 17 +- .../source/latex/hyperref/doc/manual.tex | 274 +- .../source/latex/hyperref/doc/options.tex | 132 - .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hluatex.dtx | 30 +- .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.dtx | 117 +- .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.ins | 12 +- .../texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/nameref.dtx | 2 +- .../source/latex/hyperref/psdmapshortnames.pl | 133 - Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/backref.sty | 4 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipdfm.def | 15 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def | 34 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipson.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdviwind.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hluatex.def | 43 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def | 39 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.cfg | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htexture.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtex.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexhtm.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexmrk.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hxetex.def | 15 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hylatex.ltx | 43 - Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty | 56 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hypertex.def | 13 +- .../tex/latex/hyperref/minitoc-hyper.sty | 2311 +-------------- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty | 2 +- .../texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nohyperref.sty | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def | 15 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/psdextra.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puarenc.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puenc.def | 13 +- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puvnenc.def | 13 +- 49 files changed, 2287 insertions(+), 4489 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual7.html delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/options.pdf delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/options.tex delete mode 100755 Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/psdmapshortnames.pl delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hylatex.ltx (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist') diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt index b0c661dd106..94bfe295d2b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt @@ -1,4 +1,12 @@ -2019-11-10 David Carlisle +2020-01-14 7.00d David Carlisle + * Test for newer GhostScript releases in dvips output + https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/524163/1090 + * Delete doc/options.pdf + * Add start of support for setting pdfversion to 2.0 + * Make the default driver be hdvips not hypertex + (matching configuration used in miktex/texlive since at least 2002). + +2019-11-10 7,00c David Carlisle * adjust vtex guards for issue #108 2019-11-06 David Carlisle diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/README.md index 2b58b348022..208820190f3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/README.md +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/README.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ # README for hyperref bundle -2019-11-06 +2020-01-14 ## INTRODUCTION @@ -14,24 +14,24 @@ backends. Included are: - 1. `hyperef' The main hyperlinking functionality. - 2. `backref' a package by David Carlisle to provide links back from + 1. `hyperref` The main hyperlinking functionality. + 2. `backref` a package by David Carlisle to provide links back from bibliography to the main text; these are hypertext links after using hyperref. - 3. nameref' a package to allow reference to the *names* of sections rather + 3. `nameref` a package to allow reference to the *names* of sections rather than their numbers. ## DOWNLOAD -`hyperref' is available on CTAN: +`hyperref` is available on CTAN: https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref Also a ZIP file is provided that contains the files, already sorted in a TDS tree: CTAN:install/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref.tds.zip -"CTAN:" means one of the `Comprehensive TeX Archive Network' +"CTAN:" means one of the 'Comprehensive TeX Archive Network' nodes or one of its mirrors. This is explained in https://texfaq.org/FAQ-archives @@ -44,16 +44,19 @@ The main repository of hyperref is located at github ### Installation with ZIP file in TDS format -The ZIP file `hyperref.tds.zip' contains the files sorted +The ZIP file `hyperref.tds.zip` contains the files sorted in a TDS tree. Thus you can directly unpack the ZIP file inside a TDS tree. (See CTAN:tds.zip for an explanation of TDS.) Example: + ``` cd /...somewhere.../texmf unzip /...downloadpath.../hyperref.tds.zip ``` + Do not forget to refresh the file name database of this TDS tree, Example: + ``` texhash /...somewhere.../texmf ``` @@ -62,20 +65,18 @@ Example: 1. Download the hyperref files from CTAN or the TUG server. If necessary, unpack them. - 2. If directory `beta' exists, replace the files by the counterparts - in this directory, if you want to use the latest versions. - 3. Generate the package and driver files: + 2. Generate the package and driver files: tex hyperref.ins - 4. Install the files `*.sty', `*.def', and `*.cfg' in your TDS tree: + 3. Install the files `*.sty`, `*.def`, and `*.cfg` in your TDS tree: cp *.sty *.def *.cfg TDS:tex/latex/hyperref/ - Replace `TDS:' by the prefix of your TDS tree (texmf directory). + Replace `TDS:` by the prefix of your TDS tree (texmf directory). The exception is bmhydoc.sty, it belongs to the source files (TDS:source/latex/hyperref/). - 5. Copy the documentation files to "TDS:doc/latex/hyperref/": + 4. Copy the documentation files to "TDS:doc/latex/hyperref/": manual.pdf, README.md, ChangeLog.txt, - slides.pdf, paper.pdf, options.pdf, hyperref.pdf, backref.pdf, + slides.pdf, paper.pdf, hyperref.pdf, backref.pdf, nameref.pdf (Also the HTML version of the manual can be put there.) - 6. Update the databases if necessary, eg. for texlive: + 5. Update the databases if necessary, eg. for texlive: mktexlsr .../texmf ## AUTHORS/MAINTAINERS @@ -93,8 +94,8 @@ A bug report should contain: * Comprehensive problem description. This includes error or warning messages. - * \errorcontextlines=\maxdimen can be added in the TeX code - to get more informations in TeX error messages. + * `\errorcontextlines=\maxdimen` can be added in the TeX code + to get more information in TeX error messages. * Minimal test file that shows the problem, but does not contain any unnecessary packages and code. * Used drivers/programs. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/backref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/backref.pdf index 2e4a60a3f5e..807fc4170da 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/backref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/backref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/hyperref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/hyperref.pdf index ad74de3f04e..5af41f0ccda 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/hyperref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/hyperref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manifest.txt index 4b9f3492adf..818a27d6a9e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manifest.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manifest.txt @@ -24,9 +24,6 @@ xr-hyper.sty bmhydoc.sty Help package for generating the documentation. -psdmapshortnames.pl - Helper script for generating psdextra.def. - ChangeLog.txt History of versions hylatex.ltx @@ -79,44 +76,9 @@ manual.pdf manual.html, manual[2-6].html, manual.css, cmsy10-21.gif, cmmi10-22.gif HTML version of the manual. -options.tex, options.pdf - Short description of options from package `hyperref'. paper.pdf Online version of paper for Heiko Oberdiek's talk at EuroTeX'99. slides.pdf Slides for Heiko Oberdiek's talk at EuroTeX'99. -% Directory test/ -% ============== - -test0.tex, test0.dvi, hog.eps, hog.pdf -test1.tex -test2.tex -test3.tex, phys1.jpg, phys2.jpg -test4.tex, bit.tex -test5.tex -test6.tex -test7.tex -test8.tex -testams.tex -testbib.tex, testbib.bib, testbib.bbl -testbookmark.tex -testfor2.tex -testform.tex -testnb.tex -testoz.tex -testslide.tex, seminar.con -testurl.tex, testurl.bib, testurl.bbl -picture.eps, picture.pdf, picture.png - Used in `test0.tex' and `test1.tex'. - -testbmgl.tex - Test file that produces all glyphs of PDFDocEncoding - in the bookmarks and shows the commands to produce them. -testbmu.tex - Test file that produces glyphs 0x0000 until 0x04FF - of Unicode in the bookmarks and the commands. - (Caution: large pool size needed.) - -test-bm-pu-licr.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.css b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.css index 6104bdd11a4..b857e3efd71 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.css +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.css @@ -14,7 +14,24 @@ .ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmr-12{font-size:120%;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{font-size:120%; font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} @@ -28,20 +45,10 @@ .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} -.lmsy7-{font-size:70%;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} -.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} @@ -57,6 +64,39 @@ .ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmr-9{font-size:90%;} .ec-lmr-8{font-size:80%;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{font-size:80%; font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;} +.lmsy7-{font-size:70%;} +.ec-lmbx-10{ font-weight: bold;} +.ec-lmbx-10{ font-weight: bold;} .ec-lmbx-10{ font-weight: bold;} .ec-lmbx-10{ font-weight: bold;} .ec-lmbx-10{ font-weight: bold;} @@ -83,6 +123,10 @@ .ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;} .ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;} @@ -109,10 +153,13 @@ .ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;} .ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;} -p.noindent { text-indent: 0em } -td p.noindent { text-indent: 0em; margin-top:0em; } -p.nopar { text-indent: 0em; } -p.indent{ text-indent: 1.5em } +.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;} +.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;} +p{margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0} +p.indent{text-indent:0;} +p + p{margin-top:1em;} +p + div, p + pre {margin-top:1em;} +div + p, pre + p {margin-top:1em;} @media print {div.crosslinks {visibility:hidden;}} a img { border-top: 0; border-left: 0; border-right: 0; } center { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; } @@ -135,7 +182,7 @@ div.obeylines-v p { margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; } td.displaylines {text-align:center; white-space:nowrap;} .centerline {text-align:center;} .rightline {text-align:right;} -div.verbatim {font-family: monospace; white-space: nowrap; text-align:left; clear:both; } +div.verbatim {font-family: monospace,monospace; white-space: nowrap; text-align:left; clear:both; } .fbox {padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } div.fbox {display:table} div.center div.fbox {text-align:center; clear:both; padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.html index 16fc7bddcea..4a4f4ab6d86 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.html @@ -18,10 +18,21 @@

Hypertext marks in LATEX: a manual for hyperref

Sebastian Rahtz
Heiko Oberdiek

+class="ec-lmr-12">Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)
Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)
The LATEX3 Project (https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues)
September 2019
+class="ec-lmr-12">January 2020

Contents

@@ -109,9 +120,11 @@ href="#x1-400005.21" id="QQ2-1-40">Starred form of \autoref
 5.22 Link border style
 5.23 Option "bookmarksdepth" +href="#x1-420005.23" id="QQ2-1-42">Option bookmarksdepth
 5.24 Option "pdfescapeform" +href="#x1-430005.24" id="QQ2-1-43">Option pdfescapeform
 5.25 Default driver setting
 5.26 Spaces in option values
 11.2 Index with makeindex
 11.3 Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0" +href="#x1-10400011.3" id="QQ2-1-104">Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0"
 11.4 Link anchors in figures
 11.5 Termination
 13.10 Future revisions of this license -

+

1 Introduction

-

The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the HyperTEX project, described at -http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/. It extends the functionality of all the LATEX cross-referencing -commands (including the table of contents, bibliographies etc) to produce \special commands which a -driver can turn into hypertext links; it also provides new commands to allow the user to write ad hoc -hypertext links, including those to external documents and URLs. -

The package is currently maintained at

The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the HyperTEX project, described at +http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/1 . +It extends the functionality of all the LATEX cross-referencing commands (including the table of +contents, bibliographies etc) to produce \special commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; +it also provides new commands to allow the user to write ad hoc hypertext links, including those to +external documents and URLs. + + +

The package is currently maintained at https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/ and issues should be reported there. - - -

This manual provides a brief overview of the

This manual provides a brief overview of the hyperref package. For more details, you should read the additional documentation distributed with the package, as well as the complete documentation by processing EX Web Companion, where you will find additional examples. -

The HyperTEX specification1 +

The HyperTEX specification2 says that conformant viewers/translators must recognize the following set of \special constructs:

@@ -342,7 +358,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">html:<base href = "href_string">
-

The

The href, name and end commands are used to do the basic hypertext operations of establishing links @@ -353,7 +369,7 @@ The base_name command is be used to communicate to the DVI viewer the full (URL) location of the current document so that files specified by relative URLs may be retrieved correctly. -

The

The href and name commands must be paired with an end command later in the T"’ characters should be escaped with a backslash (\), and if it looks like a URL name it may cause problems. -

However, the drivers intended to produce

However, the drivers intended to produce only PDF use literal PostScript or PDF \special commands. The commands are defined in configuration files for different drivers, selected by package @@ -412,8 +428,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips class="ec-lmbx-10">dvipsone

produces \special commands tailored for dvipsone - +class="ec-lmss-10">dvipsone
xetex
produces \special commands for XeTEX
-

Output from

Output from dvips or dvipsone must be processed using Acrobat Distiller to obtain a PDF file.2 +href="manual4.html#fn3x0">3 The result is generally preferable to that produced by using the hypertex driver, and then processing with If a driver is not given and cannot be autodetected, then us value to this option driverfallback. Example:

-

driverfallback=dvipdfm

-

Autodetected drivers (

Autodetected drivers (pdftex, xetex, vtex, driverfallback is ignored.

2 Implicit behavior

-

This package can be used with more or less any normal LAT

This package can be used with more or less any normal LATEX document by specifying in the document preamble @@ -534,8 +549,8 @@ document preamble

\usepackage{hyperref}
-

-

Make sure it comes

+

Make sure it comes last of your loaded packages, to give it a fighting chance of not being over-written, since its job is to redefine many LATEX commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references @@ -545,7 +560,7 @@ whereas \section* commands will only show links when paired with a corresponding \addcontentsline command. -

In addition, the

In addition, the hyperindex option (see below) attempts to make items in the index by hyperlinked back to the text, and the option backref inserts extra ‘back’ links into the bibliography for each entry. @@ -553,10 +568,10 @@ Other options control the appearance of links, and give extra control over PDF o colorlinks, as its name well implies, colors the links instead of using boxes; this is the option used in this document. -

+

3 Package options

-

All user-configurable aspects of

All user-configurable aspects of hyperref are set using a single ‘key=value’ scheme (using the keyval package) with the key \hypersetup macro. When the package is loaded, a file hyperref.cfg is read if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a site-wide basis. -

Note however that some options (for example

Note however that some options (for example unicode) can only be used as packge options, and not in \hypersetup as the option settings are processed as the package is read. -

As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by: +

As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by:

-

As seen in the previous example, information entries (pdftitle, pdfauthor, …) should be set after the +

+

As seen in the previous example, information entries (pdftitle, pdfauthor, …) should be set after the package is loaded. Otherwise LATEX expands the values of these options prematurely. Also LAT\hypersetup. \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 0}]{hyperref}  
\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0} -

-

Package ‘kvoptions-patch’ patches LAT

+

Package ‘kvoptions-patch’ patches LATEX to make it aware of key value options and to prevent premature value expansions. -

Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before

Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before \begin{document}, only in \usepackage[...]{hyperref}, before first use, etc. -

In the key descriptions that follow, many options do not need a value, as they default to the value +

In the key descriptions that follow, many options do not need a value, as they default to the value true if used. These are the ones classed as ‘boolean’. The values true and false can always be specified, however. -

+

3.1 General options

-

Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size. -

+

Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size.

-

+

3.2 Options for destination names

-

Destinations names (also anchor, target or link names) are internal names that identify a position on a +

Destinations names (also anchor, target or link names) are internal names that identify a position on a page in the document. They are used in link targets for inner document links or the bookmarks, for example. -

Usually anchor are set, if

Usually anchor are set, if \refstepcounter is called. Thus there is a counter name and value. Both are used to construct the destination name. By default the counter value follows the counter name separated by a dot. Example for the fourth chapter:

-

chapter.4

-

This scheme is used by: +

This scheme is used by:

\autoref
displays the description label for the reference depending on the counter name. +class="description">displays the description label for the reference depending on the counter name. +
\hyperpage
is used by the index to get page links. Page anchor setting (pageanchor) must not be turned off.
-

It is very important that the destination names are unique, because two destinations must not share +

It is very important that the destination names are unique, because two destinations must not share the same name. The counter value \the<counter> is not always unique for the counter. For example, table and figures can be numbered inside the chapter without having the chapter number in their @@ -754,7 +769,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">table.2.4 is unique because it has used \theHtable that gives 2.4 in this case. -

Often the user do not need to set

Often the user do not need to set \theH<counter>. Defaults for standard cases (chapter, …) are provided. And after hyperref is loaded, new counters with parent counters also define \@addtoreset or \numberwithin of package amsmath are used. -

Usually problems with duplicate destination names can be solved by an appropriate definition of +

Usually problems with duplicate destination names can be solved by an appropriate definition of \theH<counter>. If option hypertexnames is disabled, then a unique artificial number is used instead of @@ -774,11 +789,11 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">plainpages the page anchors use the arabic form. In both latter cases \hyperpage for index links is affected and might not work properly. -

If an unnumbered entity gets an anchor (starred forms of chapters, sections, …) or

If an unnumbered entity gets an anchor (starred forms of chapters, sections, …) or \phantomsection is used, then the dummy counter name section* and an artificial unique number is used. -

If the final PDF file is going to be merged with another file, than the destination names might clash, +

If the final PDF file is going to be merged with another file, than the destination names might clash, because both documents might contain chapter.1 or page.1. Also \renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{\jobname-#1} -

-

In document

+

In document docA the destination name chapter.2 becomes docA-chapter.2. -

Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the driver has not removed or +

Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the driver has not removed or changed them), for example:

@@ -809,8 +824,8 @@ changed them), for example:
http://somewhere/path/file.pdf#nameddest=chapter.4
-

-

However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added before, the number changes. But it is +

+

However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added before, the number changes. But it is very difficult to pass a new name for the destination to the anchor setting process that is usually deep hidden in the internals. The first name of \label after the anchor setting seems a good @@ -822,8 +837,8 @@ approximation:   \section{Introduction}  
  \label{intro} -

-

Option

+

Option destlabel checks for each \label, if there is a new destination name active and replaces the destination name by the label name. Because the destination name is already in use because of the @@ -845,8 +860,8 @@ class="ec-lmri-10">all destination names:  
  \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}%  
} -

-

The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding

+

The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding \label is more complicate, because \HyperDestLabelReplace needs the unmodified destination name as argument. This is solved by an @@ -870,12 +885,12 @@ LuaTEX):  
}  
\makeatother -

-

With option

+

With option destlabel destinations can also named manually, if the destination is not yet renamed:

-

\HyperDestRename{destinationnewname}

-

Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by

Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \hypertarget. -

-

+

3.3 Configuration options

-

- - +

In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally + calculated by the driver as simply the base line of contained + text; this options forces \special commands to reflect the + real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) + +

+

Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be + accommodated in PDF, it is only set true by default if the + pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines + into different PDF links to the same target.

+

Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor + at the top left corner. If this is turned off, \printindex will + not contain valid hyperlinks.

+

Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this.

@@ -1042,14 +1050,14 @@ class="td11">
boolean true -

In the hypertex driver, the height of links is - normally calculated by the driver as simply - the base line of contained text; this options - forces \special commands to reflect the real - height of the link (which could contain a - graphic)

boolean false -

Allows link text to break across lines; since - this cannot be accommodated in PDF, it is - only set true by default if the pdftex driver is - used. This makes links on multiple lines into - different PDF links to the same target.

boolean true -

Determines whether every page is given an - implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this is - turned off, \printindex will not contain valid - hyperlinks.

boolean false -

Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently - support this.

-

Note for option breaklinks: The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features. It -can be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links. However, at any case, the link area will -be wrong and displaced. -

+

Note for option breaklinks: The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features. It can +be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links. However, at any case, the link area will be +wrong and displaced. +

3.4 Backend drivers

-

If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in the following order: +

If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in the following order:

  1. Autodetection, some T\Hy@defaultdriver. The macro takes a driver file name
  2. Package default is hypertex.
-

Many distributions are using a driver file

Many distributions are using a driver file hypertex.cfg that define \Hy@defaultdriver with hdvips. This @@ -1080,7 +1088,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips provides much more features than hypertex for PDF generation.

class="td01">driverfallback - - +

Its value is used as driver option

+

if the driver is not given or autodetected.

dvipdfm driver. < class="td01">dvipdfmx dvipdfmx driver. < class="td01">dvips dvips driver. class="td01">dvipsone dvipsone driver. class="td01">dviwindo + + EX-compliant drivers. class="td01">latex2html pdftex program. ps2pdf dvips. class="td01">tex4ht VTeX; the PDF and HTML backends are detected class="td01">vtexpdfmark +

For use with XeTEX (using backend for dvipdfm).

@@ -1237,7 +1245,7 @@ class="td01"> class="td01">
-

Its value is used as driver option

-

if the driver is not given or autodetected.

dvipdfm -

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipdfm driver.

-

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipdfmx driver.

-

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the dvips driver.

-

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipsone driver.

-

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the dviwindo Windows previewer.

hypertex -

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the HyperTEX-compliant drivers.

-

Redefines a few macros for compatibility with

Redefines a few macros for compatibility with latex2html.

nativepdf -

An alias for

An alias for dvips

pdfmark -

An alias for

An alias for dvips

pdftex -

Sets up

Sets up hyperref for use with the pdftex program.

-

Redefines a few macros for compatibility with Ghostscript’s PDF writer, +

Redefines a few macros for compatibility with Ghostscript’s PDF writer, otherwise identical to dvips.

-

For use with

For use with TE4ht class="td01">textures

-

For use with

For use with Textures

vtex -

For use with MicroPress’

For use with MicroPress’ VTeX; the PDF and HTML backends are detected automatically.

-

For use with

For use with VTeX’s PostScript backend.

xetex -

For use with XeTEX(using backend for dvipdfm).

-

If you use

If you use dviwindo, you may need to redefine the macro \wwwbrowser (the default is   Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space  
  Internet\string\iexplore.exe} -

-

+

+

3.5 Extension options

+

Set the file extension (e.g. dvi) which will be + appended to file links created if you use the xr + package.

+

+class="ec-lmvtt-10">false. If no value is given, section is taken + as default. +

Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the + bibliography, as a list of page numbers.

+

Makes the page + numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on + unique page anchors (pageanchor, …) pageanchors + and plainpages=false.

+class="td01">hyperfootnotes +

Sets encap character for hyperindex

+

make text (section), page number (page), both (all) + or nothing (none) be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

+

make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF + and LOT

+

allow links to break over lines by making links over + multiple lines into PDF links to the same target

+

Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors + chosen depend on the the type of link. At present + the only types of link distinguished are citations, + page references, URLs, local file references, and other + links. Unlike colored boxes, the colored text remains + when printing.

+

Color for normal internal links.

+

Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers.

+

Color for bibliographical citations in text.

+

Color for URLs which open local files.

+

Color for Acrobat menu items.

+

Color for run links (launch annotations).

+

Color for linked URLs.

+

Set all color options (without border and field + options).

+

Use small caps instead of color for links.

+

Hide links (removing color and border).

+class="td01"> +class="td01"> +class="td01"> +class="td01"> - +class="td01">
extension extension text -

Set the file extension (e.g. dvi) - which will be appended to file links - created if you use the xr package.

hyperfigures hyperfigures boolean -

backref backref text false -

Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end - of each item in the bibliography, - as a list of section numbers. This - can only work properly if there is - a blank line after each \bibitem. - Supported values are

Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the + bibliography, as a list of section numbers. This can + only work properly if there is a blank line after each + \bibitem. Supported values are section, slide, +class="ec-lmvtt-10">slide, page, page, none, or false. If no value is - given, section is taken as default.

pagebackref pagebackref boolean false -

Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of - each item in the bibliography, as a - list of page numbers.

hyperindex hyperindex boolean true -

Makes the page numbers of index - entries into hyperlinks. Relays on - unique page anchors (pageanchor, - …)

pageanchors and plainpages=false. boolean true +

Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the + footnote text. Easily broken …

hyperfootnotes boolean true encap -

Makes the footnote marks into - hyperlinks to the footnote text. - Easily broken …

encap linktoc text section -

Sets encap character for hyperindex

linktoc text linktocpage boolean section false -

make text (section), page number - (page), both (all) or nothing (none) - be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

linktocpage breaklinks boolean false -

make page number, not text, be link - on TOC, LOF and LOT

breaklinks colorlinks boolean false -

allow links to break over lines by - making links over multiple lines into - PDF links to the same target

colorlinks boolean linkcolor color false red -

Colors the text of links and anchors. - The colors chosen depend on the - the type of link. At present the - only types of link distinguished are - citations, page references, URLs, - local file references, and other links. - Unlike colored boxes, the colored - text remains when printing.

linkcolor anchorcolor color red black -

Color for normal internal links.

anchorcolor citecolor color black green -

Color for anchor text. Ignored by - most drivers.

citecolor filecolor color green cyan -

Color for bibliographical citations in - text.

filecolor menucolor color cyan red -

Color for URLs which open local - files.

menucolor runcolor color red filecolor -

Color for Acrobat menu items.

runcolor urlcolor color filecolor magenta -

Color for run links (launch - annotations).

urlcolor allcolors color magenta -

Color for linked URLs.

allcolors color frenchlinks boolean false -

Set all color options (without border - and field options).

frenchlinks boolean false hidelinks -

Use small caps instead of color for - links.

hidelinks -

Hide links (removing color and - border).

-

Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard +

Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard LATEX color package. -

+

3.6 PDF-specific display options

- - +class="ec-lmvtt-10">\let\WriteBookmarks\relax +

If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them + with all the subtrees expanded. + +

+

If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include + section numbers.

+

to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

+ should be used. +

How link buttons behave when selected; /I is + for inverse (the default); the other possibilities + are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset + highlighting).

+

The color of the box around citations

+

The color of the box around links to files

+

The color of the box around normal links

+

The color of the box around Acrobat menu links

+

The color of the box around links to URLs

- - +

Color of border around ‘run’ links

+

Set all border color options

boolean true -

A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a +

A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the table of contents, requiring - two passes of LATEX. Some postprocessing of + two passes of LATEX. Some postprocessing of the bookmark file (file extension .out) may be needed to translate LAT.out file is not rewritten by LATEX if it is edited to contain a line \let\WriteBookmarks\relax

boolean false -

If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them - with all the subtrees expanded.

bookmarksopenlevel parameter -

level (

level (\maxdimen) to which bookmarks are open

boolean false -

If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include - section numbers.

text toc -

to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

boolean false -

This option should be used to produce CJK - bookmarks. Package hyperref supports both - normal and preprocessed mode of the

This option should be used to produce CJK + bookmarks. Package hyperref supports both + normal and preprocessed mode of the CJK - package; during the creation of bookmarks, + package; during the creation of bookmarks, it simply replaces CJK’s macros with special versions which expand to the corresponding character codes. Note that without the ‘unicode’ option of hyperref you get PDF files which actually violate the PDF specification because - non-Unicode character codes are used – some - PDF readers localized for CJK languages (most - notably Acroread itself) support this. Also note - that option ‘CJKbookmarks’ cannot be used - together with option ‘unicode’. -

No mechanism is provided to + non-Unicode character codes are used – some PDF + readers localized for CJK languages (most notably + Acroread itself) support this. Also note that + option ‘CJKbookmarks’ cannot be used together + with option ‘unicode’. +

No mechanism is provided to translate non-Unicode bookmarks to Unicode; for portable PDF documents only Unicode encoding - should be used.

name /I -

How link buttons behave when selected; /I is - for inverse (the default); the other possibilities - are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset - highlighting).

RGB color 0 1 0 -

The color of the box around citations

RGB color 0 .5 .5 -

The color of the box around links to files

RGB color 1 0 0 -

The color of the box around normal links

RGB color 1 0 0 -

The color of the box around Acrobat menu links

RGB color 0 1 1 -

The color of the box around links to URLs

RGB color 0 .7 .7 -

Color of border around ‘run’ links

allbordercolors -

Set all border color options

0 0 1 -

The style of box around links; defaults to a box +

The style of box around links; defaults to a box with lines of 1pt thickness, but the colorlinks option resets it to produce no border.

-

Note that the color of link borders can be specified

Note that the color of link borders can be specified only as 3 numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB color. You cannot use colors defined in TEX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true. Especially with the help of package xcolor the usual color specifications of package (x)color can be used. For further + + information see description of package hycolor. -

The bookmark commands are stored in a file called

The bookmark commands are stored in a file called jobname.out. The files is not processed by LAT \let\WriteBookmarks\relax -

-

+

+

3.7 PDF display and information options

class="td01">baseurl +

Sets the base URL of the PDF document

+ option is set, UseOutlines is used. +

Sets the document information Title field

+

Sets the document information Author field

+

Sets the document information Subject field

+

Sets the document information Creator field

+

Sets the document information Keywords field

+

Sets the document information Trapped entry. + Possible values are True, False and Unknown. + An empty value means, the entry is not set.

+

Alternative interface for setting the document + information.

+

Sets the default PDF ‘view’ for each link

+

Determines on which page the PDF file is + opened.

+

Set the startup page view

+

Set the startup page view of remote PDF files

+

Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This + should be a set of four numbers + +

- - +

position the document window in the center + of the screen

+

direction setting. Possible values: L2R (left to + right) and R2L (right to left)

+

display document title instead of file name in + title bar

+

paper handling option for print + dialog. Possible vatues are: Simplex (print + single-sided), DuplexFlipShortEdge (duplex + and flip on the short edge of the sheet), + DuplexFlipLongEdge (duplex and flip on the + long edge of the sheet)

+

resize document window to fit document size

+

PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

+

make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

+

make links that open another PDF file start a + new window

+

page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. + Possible values are UseNone, UseOutlines, + UseThumbs, and UseOC

+

number of printed copies

+

set layout of PDF pages. Possible values: + SinglePage, OneColumn, TwoColumnLeft, + TwoColumnRight, TwoPageLeft, and + TwoPageRight

+

set PDF page labels

+

set PDF page transition style. Possible values + are Split, Blinds, Box, Wipe, Dissolve, + Glitter, R, Fly, Push, Cover, Uncover, Fade. + The default according to the PDF Reference + is R, which simply replaces the old page with + the new one.

+

specify whether PDF page size is used to select + input paper tray in print dialog

+

set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible + values are MediaBox, CropBox, BleedBox, + TrimBox, and ArtBox. The dafault according + to the PDF Refence is CropBox + +

+

set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible + values are MediaBox, CropBox, BleedBox, + TrimBox, and ArtBox. The dafault according + to the PDF Refence is CropBox

+

set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

+

page scaling option for print dialog (option + /PrintScaling of viewer preferences, PDF 1.6); + valid values are None and AppDefault

+

make PDF toolbar visible

+

set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible + values are MediaBox, CropBox, BleedBox, + TrimBox, and ArtBox. The dafault according + to the PDF Refence is CropBox

+

set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible + values are MediaBox, CropBox, BleedBox, + TrimBox, and ArtBox. The dafault according + to the PDF Refence is CropBox

+

make PDF user interface elements visible

+

Unicode encoded PDF strings

+class="td01"> - - +class="td01"> - -
-

URL

URL

-

Sets the base URL of the PDF document

pdfpagemode -

text

name

empty -

Determines how the file is opening in - Acrobat; the possibilities are UseNone, - UseThumbs (show thumbnails), UseOutlines - (show bookmarks), FullScreen, UseOC (PDF - 1.5), and UseAttachments (PDF 1.6). If no +

Determines how the file is opening in + Acrobat; the possibilities are UseNone, + UseThumbs (show thumbnails), UseOutlines + (show bookmarks), FullScreen, UseOC (PDF + 1.5), and UseAttachments (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the bookmarks - option is set, UseOutlines is used.

pdftitle -

text

text

-

Sets the document information Title field

pdfauthor -

text

text

-

Sets the document information Author field

pdfsubject -

text

text

-

Sets the document information Subject field

pdfcreator -

text

text

-

Sets the document information Creator field

addtopdfproducer -

text

text

-

Adds additional text to the document +

Adds additional text to the document information Producer field

pdfkeywords -

text

text

-

Sets the document information Keywords field

pdftrapped -

text

name

empty -

Sets the document information Trapped entry.

pdfinfo -

key + value + list

empty -

Possible values are True, False and Unknown.

pdfview -

name

XYZ -

An empty value means, the entry is not set.

pdfinfo pdfstartpage -

key - value - list

integer

empty 1 -

Alternative interface for setting the document - information.

pdfview pdfstartview -

text

name

XYZ Fit -

Sets the default PDF ‘view’ for each link

pdfstartpage pdfremotestartview -

text

name

1 Fit -

Determines on which page the PDF file is - opened.

pdfstartview pdfpagescrop -

text

Fit

n + n + n + n

-

Set the startup page view

pdfremotestartview pdfcenterwindow -

text

boolean

Fit false -

Set the startup page view of remote PDF files

pdfpagescrop pdfdirection -

n - n - n - n

name

empty -

Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This - should be a set of four numbers

pdfcenterwindow pdfdisplaydoctitle -

boolean

boolean

false -

position the document window in the center - of the screen

pdfdirection pdfduplex -

text

name

empty -

direction setting

pdfdisplaydoctitle pdffitwindow -

boolean

boolean

false -

display document title instead of file name in - title bar

pdfduplex pdflang -

text

name

empty relax -

paper handling option for print dialog

pdffitwindow pdfmenubar -

boolean

boolean

false true -

resize document window to fit document size

pdflang pdfnewwindow -

text

boolean

relax false -

PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

pdfmenubar pdfnonfullscreenpagemode -

boolean

name

true empty -

make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

pdfnewwindow pdfnumcopies -

boolean

integer

false empty -

make links that open another PDF file start a - new window

pdfnonfullscreenpagemode pdfpagelayout -

text

name

empty -

page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode

pdfnumcopies pdfpagelabels -

integer

boolean

empty true -

number of printed copies

pdfpagelayout pdfpagetransition -

text

name

empty -

set layout of PDF pages

pdfpagelabels pdfpicktraybypdfsize -

boolean

boolean

true false -

set PDF page labels

pdfpagetransition pdfprintarea -

text

name

empty -

set PDF page transition style

pdfpicktraybypdfsize pdfprintclip -

text

name

empty -

set option for print dialog

pdfprintarea pdfprintpagerange -

text

n + n + (n + n)*

empty -

set /PrintArea of viewer preferences

pdfprintclip pdfprintscaling -

text

name

empty -

set /PrintClip of viewer preferences

pdfprintpagerange pdftoolbar -

n - n - (n - n)*

boolean

empty true -

set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

pdfprintscaling pdfviewarea -

text

name

empty -

page scaling option for print dialog (option - /PrintScaling of viewer preferences, PDF 1.6); - valid values are None and AppDefault

pdftoolbar pdfviewclip -

boolean

name

true empty -

make PDF toolbar visible

pdfviewarea pdfwindowui -

text

boolean

empty true -

set /ViewArea of viewer preferences

pdfviewclip unicode -

text

boolean

empty false -

set /ViewClip of viewer preferences

pdfwindowui -

boolean

true -

make PDF user interface elements visible

unicode -

boolean

false -

Unicode encoded PDF strings

-

Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set using PDF coordinate space, which +

Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set using PDF coordinate space, which is not the same as TEX’s. The unit is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also \hypercalcbp that is explained on page 46. pdfT47. pdfTEX works by supplying default values for XYZ (horizontal × @@ -2239,7 +2295,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdfstartview and pdfremotestartview parameters.

XYZ +

Fits the page to the window.

+

Fits the width of the page to the window.

+

Fits the height of the page to the window. + +

+

Fits the page bounding box to the window.

left top zoom -

Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one +

Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one is null, the source link value is used. null null Fit

-

Fits the page to the window.

FitH top -

Fits the width of the page to the window.

FitV left -

Fits the height of the page to the window.

FitR left bottom right top -

Fits the rectangle specified by the four +

Fits the rectangle specified by the four coordinates to the window.

FitB -

Fits the page bounding box to the window.

FitBH top -

Fits the width of the page bounding box to +

Fits the width of the page bounding box to the window.

FitBV left -

Fits the height of the page bounding box to +

Fits the height of the page bounding box to the window.

-

The

The pdfpagelayout can be one of the following values.

class="td01">SinglePage +

Displays a single page; advancing flips the page

+

Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling.

- - class="td01">
-

Displays a single page; advancing flips the page

OneColumn -

Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling.

TwoColumnLeft -

Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to +

Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the left.

TwoColumnRight -

Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to +

Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the right.

TwoPageLeft -

Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF +

Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF 1.5).

TwoPageRight -

Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF +

Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF 1.5).

-

Finally, the

Finally, the pdfpagetransition can be one of the following values, where /Di stands for direction of motion in degrees, generally in 90/M is for motion, either in (/I) or out (/O).

Blinds +

A box sweeps in or out.

+ + +

Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page.

+class="td01">R +class="td01">Fly +class="td01">Push + + + + + +
/Dm -

Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep +

Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep in the same direction to reveal the new page.

Box /M -

A box sweeps in or out.

Dissolve -

The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal +

The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page.

Glitter /Di -

Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the +

Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen.

Split /Dm /M -

Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page.

Wipe /Di -

A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new +

A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page.

+

Simply replaces the old page with the new one.

/Di /M +

Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the + direction specified by /Di, to or from a location that is + offscreen except when /Di is None.

/Di +

The old page slides off the screen while the new page + slides in, pushing the old page out in the direction + specified by /Di.

Cover /Di +

The new page slides on to the screen in the direction + specified by /Di, covering the old page.

Uncover /Di +

The old page slides off the screen in the direction + specified by /Di, uncovering the new page in the + direction specified by /Di.

Fade +

The new page gradually becomes visible through the old + one.

-

+

3.8 Option pdfinfo

-

The information entries can be set using

The information entries can be set using pdftitle, pdfsubject, …. Option pdfinfo provides an alternative @@ -2509,14 +2617,14 @@ strings (see PDF specification). Example:  
  }  
} -

-

+

+

3.9 Big alphabetical list

-

The following is a complete listing of available options for

The following is a complete listing of available options for hyperref, arranged alphabetically.

+

Set all border color options

+

Set all color options (without border and field + options)

+

set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers.

+

do bibliographical back references

+

set base URL for document

+

make bookmarks

+

put section numbers in bookmarks

+

open up bookmark tree

+

level to which bookmarks are open

+

to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

+

allow links to break over lines

+

to produce CJK bookmarks

+

color of border around cites

+

color of citation links

+

color links

- - +

(tex4ht, dviwindo)

+

provide details of anchors defined; same as + verbose + +

+

destinations are named by the first \label + after the anchor creation

+

do not do any hyperlinking

+

default if no driver specified or detected

+

use dvipdfm backend

+

use dvipdfmx backend

+

use dvips backend

+

use dvipsone backend

+

use dviwindo backend

+

to set encap character for hyperindex

+

suffix of linked files

+

color of border around file links

+

color of file links

+

opposite of option draft

+

use small caps instead of color for links

+

Hide links (removing color and border)

+

make figures hyper links

+

set up hyperlinked footnotes

+

set up hyperlinked indices

+

use HyperTEX backend

+

use guessable names for links

+

redefine LATEX internals

+

use LATEX2HTML backend

+

color of border around links

+class="td01"> +

color of links

+

make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

+

make page number, not text, be link on TOC, + LOF and LOT

+

color of border around menu links

+

color for menu links

- - +

an alias for dvips

+

use LATEX-computed names for links + +

+

allow nesting of links

+

put an anchor on every page

+

backreference by page number

+

text for PDF Author field

+

width of PDF link border

+

(colorlinks)

+

border style for links

+

position the document window in the center + of the screen

+

text for PDF Creator field

+

+

direction setting

+

display document title instead of file name in + title bar

+

paper handling option for print dialog

+

resize document window to fit document size

+

set highlighting of PDF links

+

alternative interface for setting document + information

+

text for PDF Keywords field

+

PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

+

an alias for dvips

+

make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

+

make links that open another PDF

+

file start a new window

+

page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode

+

number of printed copies

+

set PDF page labels

+

set layout of PDF pages

+

set default mode of PDF display

- - +

set crop size of PDF document

+

set PDF page transition style + +

+

set option for print dialog

+

set /PrintArea of viewer preferences

+

set /PrintClip of viewer preferences

+

set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

+

page scaling option for print dialog

+ + + + + +

text for PDF Title field

+

make PDF toolbar visible

+

PDF ‘view’ when on link traversal

+

set /ViewArea of viewer preferences

+

set /ViewClip of viewer preferences

+

make PDF user interface elements visible

+

do page number anchors as plain Arabic

+ +

color of border around ‘run’ links

+

color of ‘run’ links

+ +

set page size by special driver commands

+ + +

color of border around URL links

+

color of URL links

- +

be chatty

+ style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-115-"> + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-116-"> + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-117-"> - + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-118-"> + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-119-">
anchorcolor black allbordercolors -

set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers.

backref false allcolors -

do bibliographical back references

baseurl anchorcolor empty black -

set base URL for document

bookmarks backref true false -

make bookmarks

bookmarksnumbered baseurl false empty -

put section numbers in bookmarks

bookmarksopen bookmarks false true -

open up bookmark tree

bookmarksopenlevel bookmarksnumbered \maxdimen false -

level to which bookmarks are open

bookmarkstype bookmarksopen toc false -

to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

breaklinks bookmarksopenlevel false \maxdimen -

allow links to break over lines

CJKbookmarks bookmarkstype false toc -

to produce CJK bookmarks

citebordercolor breaklinks 0 1 0 false -

color of border around cites

citecolor CJKbookmarks green false -

color of citation links

colorlinks citebordercolor false 0 1 0 -

color links

citecolor true green -

(tex4ht, dviwindo)

debug colorlinks false -

provide details of anchors defined; same as - verbose

destlabel false true -

destinations are named by the first \label - after the anchor creation

draft debug false -

do not do any hyperlinking

dvipdfm destlabel false -

use dvipdfm backend

dvipdfmx draft false -

use dvipdfmx backend

dvips driverfallback -

use dvips backend

dvipsone dvipdfm -

use dvipsone backend

dviwindo dvipdfmx -

use dviwindo backend

encap dvips -

to set encap character for hyperindex

extension dvi dvipsone -

suffix of linked files

filebordercolor 0 .5 .5 dviwindo -

color of border around file links

filecolor cyan encap -

color of file links

final extension true dvi -

opposite of option draft

frenchlinks filebordercolor false 0 .5 .5 -

use small caps instead of color for links

hyperfigures filecolor false cyan -

make figures hyper links

hyperfootnotes final true -

set up hyperlinked footnotes

hyperindex frenchlinks true false -

set up hyperlinked indices

hypertex hidelinks -

use HyperTEX backend

hypertexnames hyperfigures true false -

use guessable names for links

implicit hyperfootnotes true -

redefine LATEX internals

latex2html hyperindex true -

use LATEX2HTML backend

linkbordercolor 1 0 0 hypertex -

color of border around links

linkcolor hypertexnames red true -

color of links

linktoc implicit section true -

make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

linktocpage false latex2html -

make page number, not text, be link on TOC, - LOF and LOT

menubordercolor linkbordercolor 1 0 0 -

color of border around menu links

menucolor linkcolor red -

color for menu links

nativepdf linktoc false section -

an alias for dvips

naturalnames linktocpage false -

use LATEX-computed names for links

nesting menubordercolor false 1 0 0 -

allow nesting of links

pageanchor menucolor true red -

put an anchor on every page

pagebackref nativepdf false -

backreference by page number

pdfauthor naturalnames empty false -

text for PDF Author field

pdfborder nesting 0 0 1 false -

width of PDF link border

pageanchor 0 0 0 true -

(colorlinks)

pdfcenterwindow pagebackref false -

position the document window in the center - of the screen

pdfcreator pdfauthor LaTeX with empty -

text for PDF Creator field

pdfborder hyperref 0 0 1 -

pdfdirection empty 0 0 0 -

direction setting

pdfdisplaydoctitle false pdfborderstyle -

display document title instead of file name in - title bar

pdfduplex pdfcenterwindow empty false -

paper handling option for print dialog

pdffitwindow pdfcreator false LaTeX with -

resize document window to fit document size

pdfhighlight /I hyperref -

set highlighting of PDF links

pdfinfo pdfdirection empty -

alternative interface for setting document - information

pdfkeywords pdfdisplaydoctitle empty false -

text for PDF Keywords field

pdflang pdfduplex relax empty -

PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

pdfmark pdffitwindow false -

an alias for dvips

pdfmenubar pdfhighlight true /I -

make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

pdfnewwindow pdfinfo false empty -

make links that open another PDF

pdfkeywords empty -

file start a new window

pdfnonfullscreenpagemode pdflang empty relax -

page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode

pdfnumcopies pdfmark empty false -

number of printed copies

pdfpagelayout pdfmenubar empty true -

set layout of PDF pages

pdfpagemode pdfnewwindow empty false -

set default mode of PDF display

pdfpagelabels true -

set PDF page labels

pdfpagescrop pdfnonfullscreenpagemode empty -

set crop size of PDF document

pdfpagetransition pdfnumcopies empty -

set PDF page transition style

pdfpicktraybypdfsize pdfpagelabels empty true -

set option for print dialog

pdfprintarea pdfpagelayout empty -

set /PrintArea of viewer preferences

pdfprintclip pdfpagemode empty -

set /PrintClip of viewer preferences

pdfprintpagerange pdfpagescrop empty -

set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

pdfprintscaling pdfpagetransition empty -

page scaling option for print dialog

pdfproducer pdfpicktraybypdfsize empty -

text for PDF Producer field

pdfremotestartview pdfprintarea Fit empty -

starting view of remote PDF documents

pdfstartpage pdfprintclip 1 empty -

page at which PDF document opens

pdfstartview pdfprintpagerange Fit empty -

starting view of PDF document

pdfsubject pdfprintscaling empty empty -

text for PDF Subject field

pdftex pdfproducer empty +

text for PDF Producer field

pdfremotestartview Fit +

starting view of remote PDF documents

pdfstartpage 1 +

page at which PDF document opens

pdfstartview Fit +

starting view of PDF document

pdfsubject empty -

use

text for PDF Subject field

pdftex +

use pdfTEX backend

pdftitle pdftitle empty empty -

text for PDF Title field

pdftoolbar pdftoolbar true true -

make PDF toolbar visible

pdftrapped pdftrapped empty empty -

Sets the document information Trapped entry. +

Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are True, False and Unknown. An empty value means, the entry is not set.

pdfview pdfview XYZ XYZ -

PDF ‘view’ when on link traversal

pdfviewarea pdfviewarea empty empty -

set /ViewArea of viewer preferences

pdfviewclip pdfviewclip empty empty -

set /ViewClip of viewer preferences

pdfwindowui pdfwindowui true true -

make PDF user interface elements visible

plainpages plainpages false false -

do page number anchors as plain Arabic

ps2pdf ps2pdf -

use

use ps2pdf backend

raiselinks psdextra false false -

raise up links (for

define more short names for PDF string + commands

raiselinks false +

raise up links (for HyperTEX backend)

runbordercolor runbordercolor 0 .7 .7 0 .7 .7 -

color of border around ‘run’ links

runcolor runcolor filecolor filecolor -

color of ‘run’ links

setpagesize setpagesize true true -

set page size by special driver commands

tex4ht tex4ht -

use

use TEX4ht backend

textures textures -

use

use Textures backend

unicode unicode false false -

Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true +

Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true with XeTTEX

urlbordercolor urlbordercolor 0 1 1 0 1 1 -

color of border around URL links

urlcolor urlcolor magenta magenta -

color of URL links

verbose verbose false false -

be chatty

vtex vtex -

use

use VTeX backend

xetex xetex -

use

use XeTEX backend

-

+

4 Additional user macros

-

If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the following low-level user macros are +

If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the following low-level user macros are provided: -

+

}{text}
-

The

The text is made a hyperlink to the URL; this must be a full URL (relative to the base URL, if that is defined). The special characters # and ˜ do not need to be escaped in any way (unless the command is used in the argument of another command). -

The optional argument

The optional argument options recognizes the hyperref options pdfremotestartview, pdfnewwindow @@ -3489,7 +3643,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtk-10">nextactionraw:

The value of key /Next of action dictionaries, see PDF specification.
-

+

\url{URL}
-

Similar to

Similar to \href{URLURL}}. Depending on the driver \href also tries to detect the link type. Thus the result can be a url link, file link, … -

+

\nolinkurl{URL}
-

Write

Write URL in the same way as \url, without creating a hyperlink. -

+ + +

{URL}
-

A base

A base URL is established, which is prepended to other specified URLs, to make it easier to write portable documents. -

+

}{text}
-

The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using

The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using text as the anchor. - - -

For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the browser, with the

For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the browser, with the text being ignored completely. -

+

}{text}
-

A target area of the document (the

A target area of the document (the text) is marked, and given the name category.name -

+

}{text}
-

text is made into a link to URL#category.name -

+

]{text}
-

text is made into a link to the same place as \ref{label} would be linked. -

+

}{text}
-

+

}{text}
-

A simple internal link is created with

A simple internal link is created with \hypertarget, with two parameters of an anchor name, and anchor \hyperlink has two arguments, the name class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypertarget, and the text which be used as the link on the page. -

Note that in HTML parlance, the

Note that in HTML parlance, the \hyperlink command inserts a notional # in front of each link, making it relative to the current testdocument; \href expects a full URL. -

+

\phantomsection
-

This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to

This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to \hypertarget{}{} with an automatically chosen anchor name. Often it is used in conjunction with \addcontentsline for sectionlike things (index, @@ -3686,10 +3840,10 @@ Example:  
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}  
\printindex -

-

Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, +

+

Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, not to a location before this page. -

+

\autoref class="ec-lmvtt-10">{label}
-

This is a replacement for the usual

This is a replacement for the usual \ref command that places a contextual label in front of the reference. This gives your users a bigger target to click for hyperlinks (e.g. ‘section 2’ instead of merely the number ‘2’). -

The label is worked out from the context of the original

The label is worked out from the context of the original \label command by hyperref by using the macros listed below (shown with their default values). The macros can be (re)defined in documents using @@ -3712,7 +3866,7 @@ macros listed below (shown with their default values). The macros can be (re)def class="ec-lmvtt-10">\(re)newcommand; note that some of these macros are already defined in the standard document classes. The mixture of lowercase and uppercase initial letters is deliberate and corresponds to the author’s practice. -

For each macro below,

For each macro below, hyperref checks \*autorefname before \*name. For instance, it looks for @@ -3720,7 +3874,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\*name. For instance, it looks for class="ec-lmvtt-10">\figureautorefname before \figurename.

class="td01">Macro +

Figure

+

Table

+

Part

+

Appendix

+

Equation

+

item

+

chapter

+

section

+

subsection

+

subsubsection

+

paragraph

+

footnote

class="td01">\AMSname +

Equation

+

Theorem

+

page

@@ -3841,7 +3995,7 @@ class="td01"> class="td01">
-

Default

\figurename -

Figure

\tablename -

Table

\partname -

Part

\appendixname -

Appendix

\equationname -

Equation

\Itemname -

item

\chaptername -

chapter

\sectionname -

section

\subsectionname -

subsection

\subsubsectionname -

subsubsection

\paragraphname -

paragraph

\Hfootnotename -

footnote

-

Equation

\theoremname -

Theorem

\page -

page

-

Example for a redefinition if

Example for a redefinition if babel is used:

@@ -3852,8 +4006,8 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">babel is used:  
  \def\subsectionautorefname{Unterkapitel}%  
}
-

-

Hint:

+

Hint: \autoref works via the counter name that the reference is based on. Sometimes \autoref chooses the wrong name, if the counter is used for different things. For example, it happens with @@ -3893,8 +4047,8 @@ lemmas:  
 
\end{document} -

-

+

+

{label}
-

It replaces

It replaces \pageref and adds the name for page in front of the page reference. First \pageautorefname is checked before \pagename. -

For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but not to create a +

For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but not to create a link, there are starred forms (these starred forms exist even if hyperref has been loaded with implicit=false): -

+

\ref*{label}
-

+

{label}
-

+

\autoref*{label}
-

+

{label}
-

A typical use would be to write +

A typical use would be to write

\hyperref[other]{that nice section (\ref*{other}) we read before}
-

-

We want

+

We want \ref*{other} to generate the correct number, but not to form a link, since we do this ourselves with \hyperref. -

+

Xstring}
-

\pdfstringdef returns a macro containing the PDF string. (Currently this is done globally, but do not rely on it.) All the following tasks, definitions and redefinitions are made in a group to keep them local: @@ -4035,12 +4189,12 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\textbf, etc.

  • Support for \xspace provided by the xspace package
  • -

    In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe unbalanced parentheses in +

    In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe unbalanced parentheses in the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko Oberdiek’s EuroTEX paper distributed with hyperref. -

    +

    {NoHyper}…\end{NoHyper}
    -

    Sometimes we just don’t want the wretched package interfering with us. Define an environment we +

    Sometimes we just don’t want the wretched package interfering with us. Define an environment we can put in manually, or include in a style file, which stops the hypertext functions doing anything. This is used, for instance, in the Elsevier classes, to stop hyperref playing havoc in the front matter. -

    +

    4.1 Bookmark macros

    -

    +

    4.1.1 Setting bookmarks
    -

    Usually

    Usually hyperref automatically adds bookmarks for \section and similar macros. But they can also set manually. -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is 0). As name for the +

    creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is 0). As name for the internal anchor name is used (in conjunction with level). Therefore the name must be unique (similar to \label). -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark at the current level. -

    +

    creates a bookmark at the current level. +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy. Internally the current level is increased +

    creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy. Internally the current level is increased by one. -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the command the current +

    creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the command the current bookmark level has not changed. -

    Hint: Package bookmark replaces hyperref’s bookmark organization by a new algorithm: @@ -4146,18 +4300,18 @@ class="E">EX run is needed.

  • More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font).
  • Different bookmark actions are supported (external file links, URLs, …).
  • -

    Therefore I recommend using this package. -

    +

    Therefore I recommend using this package. +

    4.1.2 Replacement macros
    -

    hyperref takes the text for bookmarks from the arguments of commands like \section, which can contain things like math, colors, or font changes, none of which will display in bookmarks as is. -

    +

    }{PDFstring}
    -

    For example, +

    For example,

    @@ -4187,8 +4341,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">}  
    }  
    \section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}}{}{Red} Mars}
    -

    -

    +

    \pdfstringdef executes the hook before it expands the string. Therefore, you can use this hook to perform additional tasks or to disable additional commands. @@ -4200,8 +4354,8 @@ perform additional tasks or to disable additional commands.  
      \renewcommand{\mycommand}[1]{}%  
    } -

    -

    However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via

    +

    However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via \pdfstringdefDisableCommands, which adds its argument to the definition of \pdfstringdefPreHook (‘@’ can here be used as letter in command @@ -4215,11 +4369,11 @@ names):  
      \let\textcolor\@gobble  
    } -

    -

    +

    +

    4.2 Utility macros

    -

    +

    {dimen specification}
    -

    \hypercalcbp takes a TEX dimen specification and converts it to bp and returns the number without the unit. This is useful for options     -\headheight-\headsep}  
    } -

    -

    The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner. -

    Note, for calculations you need either package

    +

    The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner. +

    Note, for calculations you need either package calc or ε-TEX. Nowadays the latter should automatically be enabled for LATEX formats. Users without ε-TEX, please, look in the source documentation hyperref.dtx for further limitations. -

    Also

    Also \hypercalcbp cannot be used in option specifications of \documentclass and \usepackage, because LATEX expands the option lists of these commands. However package hyperref is not yet loaded and an undefined control sequence error would arise. -

    +

    5 New Features3

    +href="manual5.html#fn4x0">4

    5.1 Option ‘pdflinkmargin’

    -

    Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ is an experimental option for specifying a link margin, if the driver supports this. +

    Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ is an experimental option for specifying a link margin, if the driver supports this. Default is 1 pt for supporting drivers. -

    +

    pdfTeX
     #1} (with Other drivers
    Unsupported.
    -

    +

    5.2 Field option ‘calculatesortkey’

    -

    Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order by default. If calculated field values +

    Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order by default. If calculated field values depend on other calculated fields that appear later in the document, then the correct calculation order can be specified with option ‘calculatesortkey’. Its value is used as key to lexicographically sort the calculated fields. The sort key do not need to be unique. Fields that share the same key are sorted in document order. -

    Currently the field option ‘calculatesortkey’ is only supported by the driver for pdfTeX. -

    +

    Currently the field option ‘calculatesortkey’ is only supported by the driver for pdfTeX. +

    5.3 Option ‘localanchorname’

    -

    When an anchor is set (e.g. via

    When an anchor is set (e.g. via \refstepcounter, then the anchor name is globally set to the current anchor name. -

    For example: +

    For example:

    @@ -4331,25 +4485,25 @@ anchor name.  
        \begin{equation}\end{equation}  
        \label{sec:foobar}
    -

    With the default global setting (localanchorname=false) a reference to ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the +

    With the default global setting (localanchorname=false) a reference to ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the equation before. With option ‘localanchorname’ the anchor of the equation is forgotten after the environment and the reference ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the section title. -

    Option ‘localanchorname’ is an experimental option, there might be situations, where the anchor +

    Option ‘localanchorname’ is an experimental option, there might be situations, where the anchor name is not available as expected. -

    +

    5.4 Option ‘customdriver’

    -

    The value of option ‘customdriver’ is the name of an external driver file without extension ‘.def’. The file +

    The value of option ‘customdriver’ is the name of an external driver file without extension ‘.def’. The file must have \ProvidesFile with a version date and number that match the date and number of ‘hyperref’, otherwise a warning is given. -

    Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver, is not well defined and +

    Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver, is not well defined and quite messy, the option is mainly intended to ease developing, testing, debugging the driver part. -

    +

    5.5 Option ‘psdextra’

    -

    LaTeX’s NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF +

    LaTeX’s NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF information entries). Many math command names (\geq, \notin, ...) are not in control of NFSS, @@ -4363,17 +4517,17 @@ on means that the short names are available. Then \geq can directly be used instead of \textgeq. -

    +

    5.6 \XeTeXLinkBox

    -

    When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only +

    When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only at the character glyphs. If there are no glyphs (images, rules, ...), then it does not generate a link annotation. Macro \XeTeXLinkBox puts its argument in a box and adds spaces at the lower left and upper right corners. An additional margin can be specified by setting it to the dimen register \XeTeXLinkMargin. The default is 2pt. -

    Example: +

    Example:

    @@ -4390,8 +4544,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\XeTeXLinkMargin. The default is 2pt.  
        }  
        \end{document}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    5.7 \IfHyperBooleanExists and \IfHyperBoolean

    @@ -4399,7 +4553,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\XeTeXLinkMargin. The default is 2pt.
     \IfHyperBooleanExists{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
    -

    If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values ‘true’ or ‘false’, then

    If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values ‘true’ or ‘false’, then \IfHyperBooleanExists calls YES, otherwise NO. @@ -4407,23 +4561,23 @@ calls YES, otherwise NO.

     \IfHyperBoolean{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
    -

    Macro

    Macro \IfHyperBoolean calls YES, if OPTION exists as boolean and is enabled. Otherwise NO is executed. -

    Both macros are expandable. Additionally option ‘stoppedearly’ is available. It is enabled if +

    Both macros are expandable. Additionally option ‘stoppedearly’ is available. It is enabled if \MaybeStopEarly or \MaybeStopNow end hyperref prematurely. -

    +

    5.8 \unichar

    -

    If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can be given by using

    If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can be given by using \unichar. Its name and syntax is inherited from package ‘ucs’. However it is defined independently for use in hyperref’s \pdfstringdef (that converts arbitrary TeX code to PDF strings or tries to do this). -

    Macro

    Macro \unichar takes a TeX number as argument, examples for U+263A (WHITE SMILING FACE): @@ -4432,7 +4586,7 @@ FACE):     \unichar{"263A}% hexadecimal notation  
        \unichar{9786}% decimal notation -

    ‘"’ must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise active. Otherwise prefix it with +

    ‘"’ must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise active. Otherwise prefix it with \string: @@ -4440,18 +4594,18 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\string:

        \unichar{\string"263A}% converts ‘"’ to ‘"’ with catcode 12 (other)
    -

    Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use

    Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use \dq instead:

        \unichar{\dq 263A}% \dq is double quote with catcode 12 (other)
    -

    -

    +

    +

    5.9 \ifpdfstringunicode

    -

    Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings. Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the +

    Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings. Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the information dictionary. The PDF specification allows two encodings ‘PDFDocEncoding’ (8-bit encoding) and ‘Unicode’ (UTF-16). The user can help using \texorpdfstring to replace complicate TeX constructs @@ -4462,7 +4616,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\ifpdfstringunicode. It is only allowed class="ec-lmvtt-10">\texorpdfstring and takes two arguments, the first allows the full range of Unicode. The second is limited to the characters available in PDFDocEncoding. -

    As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese name of Han The Thanh. Correctly +

    As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese name of Han The Thanh. Correctly written it needs some accented characters, one character even with a double accent. Class ‘tugboat.cls’ defines a macro for the typesetted name: @@ -4474,9 +4628,9 @@ defines a macro for the typesetted name:  
          ~Th\‘anh%  
        } -

    It’s not entirely correct, the second accent over the ‘e’ is not an acute, but a hook. However standard +

    It’s not entirely correct, the second accent over the ‘e’ is not an acute, but a hook. However standard LaTeX does not provide such an accent. -

    Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref. The first and the last word are already +

    Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref. The first and the last word are already supported automatically. Characters with two or more accents are a difficult business in LaTeX, because the NFSS2 macros of the LaTeX kernel do not support more than one accent. Therefore also puenc.def misses support for them. But we can provide it using     % U+1EC3 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND HOOK ABOVE -

    Thus we can put this together: +

    Thus we can put this together:

    @@ -4498,7 +4652,7 @@ is:  
          ~Th\‘anh%  
        }
    -

    For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the second accent. Alternatively we could +

    For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the second accent. Alternatively we could provide a representation without accents instead of wrong accents: @@ -4517,12 +4671,12 @@ provide a representation without accents instead of wrong accents:  
          }%  
        } -

    -

    +

    +

    5.10 Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage

    -

    Since version 2008/08/14 v6.78f. -

    For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts

    Since version 2008/08/14 v6.78f. +

    For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts \hyperpage into the index macros. After processing with Makeindex, \hyperpage analyzes its argument to detect page ranges and page comma @@ -4533,7 +4687,7 @@ lists. However, only the standard settings are supported directly:     delim_r "--"  
        delim_n ", " -

    (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains the keys that can be used in style files for +

    (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains the keys that can be used in style files for Makeindex.) Customized versions of delim_r, delim_n,    suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}" -

    (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space "\\," or "~" should be put before the first f inside +

    (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space “\\,” or “~” should be put before the first f inside \nohyperpage.) -

    +

    5.11 Experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’

    -

    The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors. This new experimental option +

    The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors. This new experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’ uses Optional Content Groups, a feature introduced in PDF 1.5. -

    A better implementation which hasn’t the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is in the ocgx2 +

    A better implementation which hasn’t the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is in the ocgx2 package. Check its documentation for details how to use it.

    -

    +

    5.12 Option ‘pdfa’

    -

    The new option ‘pdfa’ tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code generated by hyperref. However, the +

    The new option ‘pdfa’ tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code generated by hyperref. However, the result is usually not in PDF/A, because many features aren’t controlled by hyperref (XMP metadata, fonts, colors, driver dependend low level stuff, ...). -

    Currently, option ‘pdfa’ sets and disables the following items: +

    Currently, option ‘pdfa’ sets and disables the following items:

    -

    The default value of the new option ‘pdfa’ is ‘false’. It influences the loading of the package and +

    The default value of the new option ‘pdfa’ is ‘false’. It influences the loading of the package and cannot be changed after hyperref is loaded (\usepackage{hyperref}). -

    +

    5.13 Option ‘linktoc’ added

    -

    The new option ‘linktoc’ allows more control which part of an entry in the table of contents is made into +

    The new option ‘linktoc’ allows more control which part of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link:

    -

    +

    5.14 Option ‘pdfnewwindow’ changed

    -

    Before 6.77b: +

    Before 6.77b:

    -

    Since 6.77b: +

  • unused pdfnewwindow (absent)
  • +

    Since 6.77b:

    -

    Rationale: There is a difference between setting to ‘false’ and an absent entry. In the former case the +

  • unused pdfnewwindow (absent)
  • +

    Rationale: There is a difference between setting to ‘false’ and an absent entry. In the former case the new document replaces the old one, in the latter case the PDF viewer application should respect the user preference. -

    +

    5.15 Flag options for PDF forms

    -

    PDF form field macros (

    PDF form field macros (\TextField, \CheckBox, ...) support boolean flag options. The option name is the lowercase version of the names in the PDF specification (1.7): -

    http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html -

    http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/pdf_reference.pdf -

    Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets: +

    Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets:

    -

    New option ‘export’ sets the export format of a submit action. Valid values are (upper- or +

    New option ‘export’ sets the export format of a submit action. Valid values are (upper- or lowercase):

    -

    +

    5.16 Option ‘pdfversion’

    -

    This is an experimental option. It notifies ‘hyperref’ about the intended PDF version. Currently this is +

    This is an experimental option. It notifies ‘hyperref’ about the intended PDF version. Currently this is used in code for PDF forms (implementation notes 116 and 122 of PDF spec 1.7). -

    Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not supported, because most drivers expect +

    Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not supported, because most drivers expect higher PDF versions. -

    The option must be used early, not after

    The option must be used early, not after \usepackage{hyperref}. -

    In theory this option should also set the PDF version, but this is not generally supported. +

    In theory this option should also set the PDF version, but this is not generally supported.

    -

    The current PDF version is used as default if this version can be detected (only pdfTeX >= 1.10a). +

    The current PDF version is used as default if this version can be detected (only pdfTeX 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest version 1.2 is assumed. Thus ‘hyperref’ tries to avoid PDF code that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF features. -

    +

    5.17 Field option ‘name’

    -

    Many form objects uses the label argument for several purposes: +

    Many form objects uses the label argument for several purposes:

    +
  • As name in HTML structures.
  • -

    Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can break in the structures of the output format. If option + +

    Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can break in the structures of the output format. If option ‘name’ is given, then its value is used as name in the different output structures. Thus the value should consist of letters only. -

    +

    5.18 Option ‘pdfencoding’

    -

    The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries in the information dictionary: -PDFDocEncoding and Unicode as UTF-16BE. Option "pdfencoding" selects between these +

    The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries in the information dictionary: +PDFDocEncoding and Unicode as UTF-16BE. Option pdfencoding selects between these encodings:

    -

    The luatex driver uses "unicode" by default. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done -in

    The luatex driver uses unicode by default. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done in +hypersetup. -

    +

    5.19 Color options/package hycolor

    -

    See documentation of package ‘hycolor’. -

    +

    See documentation of package ‘hycolor’. +

    5.20 Option pdfusetitle

    -

    If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor +

    If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor from \title and \author. An optional argument for \title and \author is supported (class amsart). -

    +

    5.21 Starred form of \autoref

    -

    \autoref* generates a reference without link as \ref* or \pageref*. -

    +

    5.22 Link border style

    -

    Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or options "colorlinks", "frenchlinks". This is -done by option

    Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or options colorlinks, frenchlinks. This is done by +option pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1} -

    Some remarks: +

    Some remarks:

    +

    Unsupported:

    -

    +

    5.23 Option "bookmarksdepth"

    -

    The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new option "bookmarksdepth". The option acts + id="x1-420005.23">Option bookmarksdepth +

    The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new option bookmarksdepth. The option acts globally and distinguishes three cases:

    -

    +

    +

    5.24 Option "pdfescapeform"

    -

    There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in + id="x1-430005.24">Option pdfescapeform +

    There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched left or right parentheses need escaping or the escape character itself (backslash). Since 2006/02/12 v6.75a the PS/PDF driver should do this automatically. However I assume a problem with compatibility, especially regarding the form part where larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present. It would be a pain to remove all the escaping, because an additional escaping layer can falsify the code. -

    Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced: +

    Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced:

    -

    +

    5.25 Default driver setting

    -

    (hyperref >= 6.72s) If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the most suitable -driver. Thus it loads "hpdftex", if pdfTeX is detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the +

    (hyperref 6.72s) If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the most suitable +driver. Thus it loads hpdftex, if pdfTeX is detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the corresponding VTeX driver for VTeX’s working modes. Unhappily many driver programs run after the TeX compiler, so hyperref does not have a chance (dvips, dvipdfm, ...). In this -case driver "hypertex" is loaded that supports the HyperTeX features that are recognized by +case driver hypertex is loaded that supports the HyperTeX features that are recognized by xdvi for example. This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configuration file -"hyperref.cfg": +hyperref.cfg:

        \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}
    -

    for dvips, or +

    for dvips, or

        \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}
    -

    for the default behaviour of hyperref. -

    See also the new option ‘driverfallback’. -

    +

    for the default behaviour of hyperref. +

    See also the new option ‘driverfallback’. +

    5.26 Backref entries

    -

    Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example: +

    Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example:

    @@ -5008,11 +5197,11 @@ xdvi for example. This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configur  
     
    \end{document}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    5.27 \phantomsection

    -

    Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction with

    Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction with \addcontentsline for sectionlike things (index, bibliography, preface). \addcontentsline refers to the latest previous location where an anchor is @@ -5025,15 +5214,15 @@ set.  
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}  
      \printindex -

    -

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index +

    +

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, not to a location before this page. -

    +

    6 Acrobat-specific behavior

    -

    If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following macro is provided +

    If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following macro is provided in the appropriate drivers: -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    The

    The text is used to create a button which activates the appropriate menuoption. The following table lists the option names you can use—comparison of this with the menus in Acrobat Reader or Exchange will show what they do. Obviously some are only appropriate to Exchange.

    style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-1-"> class="td01">FileExport +

    Properties

    +

    About

    @@ -5261,13 +5450,13 @@ class="td01"> class="td01">
    File -

    Open, +

    Open, Close, Scan, Save, @@ -5076,7 +5265,7 @@ class="td10"> class="td01">FileImport

    -

    ImportImage, +

    ImportImage, ImportNotes, AcroForm:ImportFDF

    -

    ExportNotes, +

    ExportNotes, AcroForm:ExportFDF

    FileDocumentInfo -

    GeneralInfo, +

    GeneralInfo, OpenInfo, FontsInfo, SecurityInfo, @@ -5104,7 +5293,7 @@ class="td10"> class="td01">FilePreferences

    -

    GeneralPrefs, +

    GeneralPrefs, NotePrefs, FullScreenPrefs, Weblink:Prefs, @@ -5116,7 +5305,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-6-">

    Edit -

    Undo, +

    Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, @@ -5132,19 +5321,19 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-7-">

    -

    Properties

    EditFields -

    AcroForm:Duplicate, +

    AcroForm:Duplicate, AcroForm:TabOrder

    Document -

    Cpt:CapturePages, +

    Cpt:CapturePages, AcroForm:Actions, CropPages, RotatePages, @@ -5162,7 +5351,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-10-">

    View -

    ActualSize, +

    ActualSize, FitVisible, FitWidth, FitPage, @@ -5186,7 +5375,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-11-">

    Tools -

    Hand, +

    Hand, ZoomIn, ZoomOut, SelectText, @@ -5206,7 +5395,7 @@ class="td10"> class="td01">ToolsSearch

    -

    AcroSrch:Query, +

    AcroSrch:Query, AcroSrch:Indexes, AcroSrch:Results, AcroSrch:Assist, @@ -5220,7 +5409,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-13-">

    Window -

    ShowHideToolBar, +

    ShowHideToolBar, ShowHideMenuBar, ShowHideClipboard, Cascade, @@ -5231,7 +5420,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-14-">

    Help -

    HelpUserGuide, +

    HelpUserGuide, HelpTutorial, HelpExchange, HelpScan, @@ -5246,7 +5435,7 @@ class="td10"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-40-15-">

    Help(Windows) -

    About

    -

    +

    7 PDF and HTML forms

    -

    You must put your fields inside a

    You must put your fields inside a Form environment (only one per file). -

    There are six macros to prepare fields: -

    +

    There are six macros to prepare fields: +

    ]{label}
    -

    +

    ]{label}
    -

    +

    }{choices}
    -

    +

    ]{label}
    -

    +

    ]{label}
    -

    +

    ]{label}
    -

    The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: -

    +

    The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: +

    }{field}
    -

    +

    }{field}
    -

    +

    }{field}
    -

    These macros default to #1 #2 -

    What is actually shown in as the field is determined by: -

    +

    These macros default to #1 #2 +

    What is actually shown in as the field is determined by: +

    }{height}
    -

    +

    }{height}
    -

    +

    }{height}
    -

    +

    }{height}
    -

    +

    \MakeButtonField{text}
    -

    These macros default to

    These macros default to \vbox to #2{\hbox #1{\hfill}\vfill}, except the l to #1; it is used for buttons, and the special \Submit and \Reset macros. -

    You may also want to redefine the following macros: +

    You may also want to redefine the following macros:

    @@ -5492,12 +5681,12 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\Reset macros.  
    \def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip}  
    \def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    7.1 Forms environment parameters

    action encoding method @@ -5552,15 +5741,15 @@ class="td01">
    URL -

    The URL that will receive the form data if a

    The URL that will receive the form data if a Submit button is included in the form

    name -

    The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding +

    The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding is usual, and html is the only valid value

    name -

    Used only when generating HTML; values can be

    Used only when generating HTML; values can be post or get

    -

    +

    7.2 Forms optional parameters

    -

    Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e. 

    Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e. color=0 0 0.5)

    style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-56-63-">
    -

    +

    8 Defining a new driver

    -

    A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros: -

    1.

    A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros: +

    1. \hyper@anchor -

    2.

    2. \hyper@link -

    3.

    3. \hyper@linkfile -

    4.

    4. \hyper@linkurl -

    5.

    5. \hyper@anchorstart -

    6.

    6. \hyper@anchorend -

    7.

    7. \hyper@linkstart -

    8.

    8. \hyper@linkend -

    The draft option defines the macros as follows +

    The draft option defines the macros as follows

    @@ -6047,11 +6236,11 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyper@linkend  
    \let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo  
    \let\hyper@linkend\@empty
    -

    -

    +

    +

    9 Special support for other packages

    -

    Package

    Package hyperref aims to cooperate with other packages, but there are several possible sources for conflict, such as

    -

    The

    The hyperref package is distributed with variants on two useful packages designed to work especially well with it. These are xr and minitoc, which support crossdocument links using \label/\ref mechanisms and per-chapter tables of contents, respectively. -

    +

    9.1 Package Compatibility

    -

    Currently only package loading orders are available: -

    Note: hyperref loads package "nameref" at

    Currently only package loading orders are available: +

    Note: hyperref loads package nameref at \begin{document}. Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded earlier. -

    +

    9.1.1 algorithm
    @@ -6099,11 +6289,11 @@ package must be loaded earlier.  
      \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg. -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.2 amsmath
    -

    The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well. For example, there might be +

    The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well. For example, there might be spacing problems (eqnarray isn’t recommended anyway, see CTAN:info/l2tabu/, the situation for equation is unclear, because nobody is interested in investigating). Consider using the environments that package amsmath provide, e.g. gather for equation. The environment equation can even redefined to use @@ -6115,22 +6305,22 @@ gather:  
      \let\equation\gather  
      \let\endequation\endgather -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.3 amsrefs
    -

    Package loading order: +

    Package loading order:

      \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{amsrefs}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.4 arydshln, longtable
    -

    Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln, hyperref after arydshln generates an error, +

    Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln, hyperref after arydshln generates an error, thus the resulting package order is then: @@ -6139,16 +6329,16 @@ thus the resulting package order is then:  
      \usepacakge{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{arydshln} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.5 babel/magyar.ldf
    -

    The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work. You need at least version 1.5, maintained by Péter +

    The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work. You need at least version 1.5, maintained by Péter Szabó, see CTAN:language/hungarian/babel/. -

    +

    9.1.6 babel/spanish.ldf
    -

    Babel’s spanish.ldf redefines ‘

    Babel’s spanish.ldf redefines ‘\.’ to support ‘\...’. In bookmarks (\pdfstringdef) only ‘\.’ is supported. If ‘\...’ is needed, \texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots} can be used instead. -

    +

    9.1.7 bibentry
    -

    Workaround: +

    Workaround:

    @@ -6178,16 +6368,16 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots} can be use  
        \nobibliography{database}  
      \endgroup
    -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.8 bigfoot
    -

    Hyperref does not support package ‘bigfoot’. And package ‘bigfoot’ does not support hyperref’s footnotes +

    Hyperref does not support package ‘bigfoot’. And package ‘bigfoot’ does not support hyperref’s footnotes and disables them (hyperfootnotes=false). -

    +

    9.1.9 chappg
    -

    Package ‘chappg’ uses

    Package ‘chappg’ uses \@addtoreset that is redefined by ‘hyperref’. The package order is therefore: @@ -6196,11 +6386,11 @@ therefore:   \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{chappg} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.10 cite
    -

    This is from Mike Shell: cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref. However, I can do a workaround +

    This is from Mike Shell: cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref. However, I can do a workaround via: @@ -6211,14 +6401,14 @@ via:  
     
     \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref} -

    -

    so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty will work as normal - +

    +

    so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty will work as normal - although the citations will not be hyperlinked, of course (But this may not be an issue for many people). -

    +

    9.1.11 count1to
    -

    Package ‘count1to’ adds several

    Package ‘count1to’ adds several \@addtoreset commands that confuse ‘hyperref’. Therefore \theH<...> has to be fixed: @@ -6234,26 +6424,27 @@ has to be fixed:  
        \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%  
      } -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.12 dblaccnt
    -

    pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before: +

    pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before:

      \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{dblaccnt}
    -

    or see entry for "vietnam". -

    +

    or see entry for vietnam. +

    9.1.13 easyeqn
    -

    Not compatible, breaks. -

    +

    Not compatible, breaks. +

    9.1.14 ellipsis
    -

    This packages redefines

    This packages redefines \textellipsis after package hyperref (pd1enc.def/puenc.def should be loaded before): @@ -6262,8 +6453,8 @@ before):   \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{ellipsis} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.15 float
    @@ -6272,35 +6463,36 @@ before):  \usepackage{float}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    +

    -

    +

    9.1.16 endnotes
    -

    Unsupported. -

    +

    Unsupported. +

    9.1.17 foiltex
    -

    Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b: Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into

    Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b: Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into \@begindvi, it uses package ‘atbegshi’ instead, that hooks into \shipout. Thus the patch of ‘foils.cls’ regarding hyperref is now obsolete and causes an undefined error message about \@hyperfixhead. This is fixed in FoilTeX 2.1.4b. -

    +

    9.1.18 footnote
    -

    This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref’s footnote support by using option -"hyperfootnotes=false". -

    +

    This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref’s footnote support by using option +hyperfootnotes=false. +

    9.1.19 geometry
    -

    Driver ‘dvipdfm’ and program ‘dvipdfm’ might generate a warning: Sorry. Too late to change page size +

    Driver ‘dvipdfm’ and program ‘dvipdfm’ might generate a warning: Sorry. Too late to change page size Then prefer the program ‘dvipdfmx’ or use one of the following workarounds to move the \special of geometry to an earlier location: @@ -6333,22 +6525,24 @@ geometry to an earlier location:  
        ]{geometry}  
        \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.20 IEEEtran.cls
    -

    version >= V1.6b (because of

    version V1.6b (because of \@makecaption, see ChangeLog) -

    +

    9.1.21 index
    -

    version >= 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of

    version 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \addcontentsline redefinition) -

    +

    9.1.22 lastpage
    -

    Compatible. -

    +

    Compatible. +

    9.1.23 linguex
    @@ -6357,8 +6551,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\addcontentsline redefinition)  \usepackage{hyperref}  
      \usepackage{linguex} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.24 ltabptch
    @@ -6368,20 +6562,20 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\addcontentsline redefinition)  
      \usepackage{ltabptch}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.25 mathenv
    -

    Unsupported. -

    Both ‘mathenv’ and ‘hyperref’ messes around with environment ‘eqnarray’. You can load ‘mathenv’ +

    Unsupported. +

    Both ‘mathenv’ and ‘hyperref’ messes around with environment ‘eqnarray’. You can load ‘mathenv’ after ‘hyperref’ to avoid an error message. But \label will not work inside environment ‘eqnarray’ properly, for example. -

    +

    9.1.26 minitoc-hyper
    -

    This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original package minitoc instead. -

    +

    This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original package minitoc instead. +

    9.1.27 multind
    @@ -6390,8 +6584,8 @@ properly, for example.  \usepackage{multind}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.28 natbib
    @@ -6400,18 +6594,18 @@ properly, for example.  \usepackage{natbib}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.29 nomencl
    -

    Example for introducing links for the page numbers: +

    Example for introducing links for the page numbers:

          \renewcommand*{\pagedeclaration}[1]{\unskip, \hyperpage{#1}}
    -

    -

    For equations the following might work: +

    +

    For equations the following might work:

    @@ -6421,8 +6615,8 @@ properly, for example.  
        But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name  
        is not available in general.
    -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.30 parskip
    @@ -6431,10 +6625,10 @@ properly, for example.  \usepackage{parskip}  
      \usepackage{hyperref}[2012/08/20] -

    -

    Both packages want to redefine

    +

    Both packages want to redefine \@starttoc. -

    +

    9.1.31 prettyref
    @@ -6459,8 +6653,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  
    %%% example for prettyref %%%  
           -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.32 ntheorem
    @@ -6472,8 +6666,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  
        \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem}  
      But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...). -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.33 setspace
    @@ -6482,8 +6676,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  \usepackage{setspace}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.34 sidecap
    @@ -6494,8 +6688,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  
        \usepackage{hyperref}  
        \usepackage{sidecap} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.35 subfigure
    @@ -6519,8 +6713,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  
        \usepackage{subfigure}  
        or vice versa? -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.36 titleref
    @@ -6530,25 +6724,27 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@starttoc.  
      \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.37 tabularx
    -

    Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment ‘tabularx’, because they uses the optional +

    Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment ‘tabularx’, because they uses the optional argument of \footnotetext, see section ‘Limitations’. Before version 2011/09/28 6.82i hyperref had disabled footnotes entirely by ‘hyperfootnotes=false’. -

    +

    9.1.38 titlesec
    -

    "nameref" supports titlesec, but hyperref does not (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with +

    nameref supports titlesec, but hyperref does not (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones). -

    +

    9.1.39 ucs/utf8x.def
    -

    The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it does some calculations and stores the result in a +

    The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it does some calculations and stores the result in a macro for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence. However this makes the first call -non-expandable and will break if used in information entries or bookmarks. Package "ucs" offers +non-expandable and will break if used in information entries or bookmarks. Package ucs offers \PrerenderUnicode or \PreloadUnicodePage to solve this: @@ -6561,14 +6757,14 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\PreloadUnicodePage to solve this:  
        \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1}  
        \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}} -

    The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes for the README file, you can use the +

    The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes for the README file, you can use the characters directly. -

    +

    9.1.40 varioref
    -

    There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to sort them out. Therefore this package is +

    There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to sort them out. Therefore this package is now unsupported. -

    Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works with the following loading +

    Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works with the following loading order: @@ -6577,10 +6773,10 @@ order:  
        \usepackage{varioref}  
        \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample, 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for +

    +

    Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample, 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks the hyperref support for varioref. -

    Also unsupported: +

    Also unsupported:

    -

    +

    9.1.41 verse
    -

    Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref. -

    For older versions see example from de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified): +

    Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref. +

    For older versions see example from de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified):

    @@ -6637,8 +6833,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\vpageref[]{...} On the same page a pre  
     
      \end{document}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.42 vietnam
    @@ -6649,85 +6845,95 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\vpageref[]{...} On the same page a pre  
      \usepackage{vietnam}  
      \usepackage{hyperref} -

    -

    +

    +

    9.1.43 XeTeX
    -

    Default for the encoding of bookmarks is ‘pdfencoding=auto’. That means the strings are always treated +

    Default for the encoding of bookmarks is ‘pdfencoding=auto’. That means the strings are always treated as unicode strings. Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, it is written as ASCII string. The reason is that the \special does not support PDFDocEncoding. -

    XeTeX uses the program xdvipdfmx for PDF output generation. This program behaves a little +

    XeTeX uses the program xdvipdfmx for PDF output generation. This program behaves a little different from dvipdfm, because of the supported Unicode characters. Strings for bookmarks or information entries can be output directly. The big chars (char code > 255) are written in UTF-8 and xdvipdfmx tries to convert them to UTF-16BE. However hyperref already provides PDF strings encoded in UTF-16BE, thus the result is a warning -

    "Failed to convert input string to UTF16..." -

    The best way would be, if xdvipdfm could detect the byte order marker (

    Failed to convert input string to UTF16... +

    The best way would be, if xdvipdfm could detect the byte order marker (\376\377) and skips the conversion if that marker is present. -

    For the time being I added the following to hyperref, when option ‘pdfencoding=auto’ is set (default +

    For the time being I added the following to hyperref, when option ‘pdfencoding=auto’ is set (default for XeTeX): The string is converted back to big characters thus that the string is written as UTF-8. But I am very unhappy with this solution. Main disadvantage: Two versions of \pdfstringdef are needed: -

    a) The string is converted back to big characters for the "tainted keys" of xdvipdfmx +

    a) The string is converted back to big characters for the “tainted key” of xdvipdfmx (spc_pdfm.c: default_taintkeys). The subset hyperref uses is /Title, /Author, /Subject, /Keywords, /Creator, /Producer, /T. Any changes of this set in xdvipdfmx cannot be detected by hyperref. -

    b) Without conversion for the other strings , providing UTF16be directly. Examples: Prefix of page +

    b) Without conversion for the other strings , providing UTF16be directly. Examples: Prefix of page labels, some elements of formulars. -

    Thus

    Thus each application that uses \pdfstringdef now must check, if it defines a string for some of the tained keys. If yes, then the call of \pdfstringdef should be preceded by -"\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname". Example: package bookmark. -

    +class="ec-lmvtt-10"> HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname. Example: package bookmark. +

    10 Limitations4

    +href="manual6.html#fn5x0">5

    10.1 Wrapped/broken link support

    -

    Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other +

    Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other drivers lack this feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone. -

    Workarounds: +

    Workarounds:

    -

    +

    10.2 Links across pages

    -

    In general they have problems: +

    In general they have problems:

    -

    +

    10.3 Footnotes

    -

    LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (

    LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (\footnotemark, \footnotetext). This interface might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between @@ -6743,14 +6949,14 @@ Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional argument of \footnotemark\verb and \footnotetext. -

    +

    11 Hints5

    +href="manual7.html#fn6x0">6

    11.1 Spaces in option values

    -

    Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in

    Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in \documentclass or \usepackage (or \RequirePackage), e.g.:

        \usepackage[pdfborder=0 0 1]{hyperref}
    -

    Package hyperref now gets +

    Package hyperref now gets

        pdfborder=001
    -

    and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used: +

    and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used:

        \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 1}]{hyperref}
    -

    Some options can also be given in

    Some options can also be given in \hypersetup

        \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1}
    -

    In

    In \hypersetup the options are directly processed as key value options (see package keyval) without space stripping in the value part. -

    Alternatively, LaTeX’s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by -one of the packages "kvoptions-patch" (from project "kvoptions") or "xkvltxp" (from project -"xsetkeys"). -

    +

    Alternatively, LaTeX’s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by one of the +packages kvoptions-patch (from project kvoptions) or xkvltxp (from project xsetkeys). +

    11.2 Index with makeindex

    -

    +

    +

    11.3 Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0"

    -

    Getting rid of it: + id="x1-10400011.3">Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0" +

    Getting rid of it:

    @@ -6857,15 +7070,16 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage will be defined regardless  
    \providecommand*{\toclevel@<foobar>}{0}  
    \makeatother
    -

    -

    +

    +

    11.4 Link anchors in figures

    -

    The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding -anchor. Unhappily the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not visible if a link jumps to a -figure. In this case, try package "hypcap.sty" that implements a method to circumvent the +

    The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding +anchor. Unhappily the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not visible if a link jumps +to a figure. In this case, try package hypcap that implements a method to circumvent the problem. -

    +

    11.5 Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:

    @@ -6874,14 +7088,14 @@ problem. \documentclass[pdftex]{article}  
    \usepackage[unicode]{hyperref} -

    -

    Support for additional unicode characters: -

    Example:

    +

    Support for additional unicode characters: +

    Example: \.{a} and \d{a} -

    1. Get a list with unicode data, eg: -

    http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt -

    2. Identify the characters (

    1. Get a list with unicode data, eg: +

    http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt +

    2. Identify the characters (\.{a}, \d{a}): @@ -6890,9 +7104,9 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\d{a}):     0227;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT ABOVE;...  
        1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;... -

    -

    3. Calculate the octal code: -

    The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a +

    +

    3. Calculate the octal code: +

    The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.) @@ -6900,9 +7114,10 @@ backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.)     0227 -> \002\047  
        1EA1 -> \036\241 -

    -

    4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: -

    Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by "9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in octal +

    +

    4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: +

    Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by 9 (8 and 9 cannot occur in octal numbers): @@ -6910,8 +7125,9 @@ numbers):     \002\047 -> \9002\047  
        \036\241 -> \9036\241 -

    -

    Optional: "8" is used for abbreviations: +

    +

    Optional: 8 is used for abbreviations:

    @@ -6919,8 +7135,8 @@ numbers):  
     
        \9002\047 -> \82\047
    -

    -

    5. Declare the character with LaTeX: +

    +

    5. Declare the character with LaTeX:

    @@ -6932,16 +7148,17 @@ numbers):  
    \end{document}  
          
    -

    -

    +

    +

    11.6 Footnotes

    -

    The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use

    The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use \footnotemark and \footnotetext out of order or reusing \footnotemark. Here you can either disable hyperref’s footnote support by -"hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros, nasty examples: +hyperfootnotes=false or fiddle with internal macros, nasty examples:

    @@ -6993,12 +7210,12 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark. Here you can either disa  
     
    \end{document}
    -

    +

    -

    +

    11.7 Subordinate counters

    -

    Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For +

    Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For example, sections or figures might be numbered within chapters or \newtheorem is used with an optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses \@addtoreset to catch this situation. Also \numberwithin of package amsmath is caught by hyperref. -

    However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old +

    However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old meaning of \@addtoreset is called without hyperref’s additions. Then the companion counter macro \theH<counter> can be redefined accordingly. Or move the definition of subordinate counters after hyperref is loaded. -

    Example for

    Example for \newtheorem, problematic case: @@ -7021,14 +7238,14 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem, problematic case:     \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]  
        \usepackage{hyperref} -

    Solution a) +

    Solution a)

        \usepackage{hyperref}  
        \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section}
    -

    Solution b) +

    Solution b)

    @@ -7036,11 +7253,11 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem, problematic case:  
        \usepackage{hyperref}  
        \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}}
    -

    -

    +

    +

    12 History and acknowledgments

    -

    The original authors of

    The original authors of hyperbasics.tex and hypertex.sty, from which this package descends, are Tanmoy Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package

    Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has +

    Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has made the package more robust. The days spent on RevTEX are entirely due to him! The investigations of Bill Moss into the later versions including native PDF support uncovered a good many bugs, and his testing is appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of insight into PDF. -

    Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the

    Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the dvipsone and dviwindo drivers. Sergey Lesenko provided the changes needed for hyper package (developed in parallel with hyperref) showed me solutions for some problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one day. -

    The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T. V. Raman, for encouragement, support and +

    The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T. V. Raman, for encouragement, support and ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF provided crucial insights; D. P. Story, whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical problems; and Hans Hagen, who explained how to do it in pdftex. -

    Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost. -

    Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the

    Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost. +

    Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the backref module, the ps2pdf and dviwindo support, frequent general rewrites of my bad code, and for working on changes to the xr package to suit diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.pdf index d5c51b278d3..ac426cd07d8 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual2.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual2.html index dc86192660c..cfc5150328b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual2.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual2.html @@ -11,8 +11,10 @@

    -

    1This is borrowed from an article by Arthur Smith.

    +class="ec-lmr-8">Now: https://ctan.org/tex-archive/support/hypertex/hypertex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual3.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual3.html index d08f1b9eb8b..3dcd508fdb0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual3.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual3.html @@ -11,14 +11,8 @@
    -

    2Make sure you turn off the partial font downloading supported by dvips and dvipsone in favor of Distiller’s own - system.

    +class="ec-lmr-8">This is borrowed from an article by Arthur Smith. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual4.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual4.html index fd0e5d8fc26..6322ca81b96 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual4.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual4.html @@ -11,8 +11,14 @@
    -

    3This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual

    +class="ec-lmr-8">Make sure you turn off the partial font downloading supported by dvips and dvipsone in favor of Distiller’s own + system. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual7.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual7.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c891e7a0b5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/manual7.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +
    + 6This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual
    + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/nameref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/nameref.pdf index 8a845a68013..ef19a84606e 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/nameref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/nameref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/options.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/options.pdf deleted file mode 100644 index 3fd08517572..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/hyperref/options.pdf and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/backref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/backref.dtx index 35c37252f5e..c0747046ad1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/backref.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/backref.dtx @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ %% Copyright (C) 1995-2000 David Carlisle, Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019- The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %\ProvidesFile{backref.drv} % \fi % \ProvidesFile{backref.dtx} - [2016/05/21 v1.39 Bibliographical back referencing]% + [2020/01/14 v1.40 Bibliographical back referencing]% % % \CheckSum{768} % @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ last revised \filedate.% }% }% - \author{David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)}% + \author{David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)\thanks{\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues}}}% \date{\filedate}% \maketitle \makeatletter diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/bmhydoc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/bmhydoc.sty index e6491796ca1..d25c4d6bf81 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/bmhydoc.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/bmhydoc.sty @@ -1,6 +1,13 @@ +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2015 Heiko Oberdiek +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project +%% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues +%% +%% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{bmhydoc} - [2019/01/08 Bookmark section with hyperref documentation (HO)] + [2020/01/14 Bookmark section with hyperref documentation (HO)] % This package adds bookmark entries that are added at the end % and lists and links the PDF files of the hyperref documentation. @@ -43,9 +50,6 @@ } \AtEndDocument{% \@bmhydoc[open=false]{0}{manual.pdf}{Hyperref manual} -% \@bmhydoc{1}{README.pdf}{README} -% \@bmhydoc{1}{ChangeLog.pdf}{ChangeLog} - \@bmhydoc{1}{options.pdf}{Options} \@bmhydoc{1}{slides.pdf}{Bookmark talk, slides} \@bmhydoc{2}{paper.pdf}{Bookmark talk, paper} \@bmhydoc{1}{hyperref.pdf}{Sources: hyperref.dtx} @@ -77,10 +81,7 @@ \entry{manual.pdf}{\textbf{Manual}} The \textbf{USER MANUAL} (also available as HTML). \entry{ChangeLog.txt}{ChangeLog} - This file records the version history - (also available as text file). - \entry{options.pdf}{Options} - This file provides a short option summary. + This file records the version history. \entry{slides.pdf}{Bookmark talk, slides} Slides for the talk ``PDF information and navigation elements with hyperref, pdfTeX and thumbpdf'' at Euro\TeX~1999. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/manual.tex index 1fba391fcd4..242388fef93 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/manual.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/manual.tex @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ % Copyright (C) 2003 Steve Peter and Karl Berry % Copyright (C) 2006-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. % Copyright (C) 2017-2019 David Carlisle Ulrike Fischer -% Copyright (C) 2019- The LaTeX3 Project +% Copyright (C) 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project % % Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document % under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ % ``GNU Free Documentation License.'' % -\def\mydate{September 2019} +\def\mydate{January 2020} -\RequirePackage{ifpdf} +\RequirePackage{iftex} \ifpdf % We are running pdfTeX in pdf mode \ifx\directlua\undefinded \documentclass[pdftex]{article} @@ -39,6 +39,7 @@ \texttt{\textbackslash #1}% } \newcommand*{\xpackage}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\xoption}[1]{\textsf{#1}} % from doc.sty \makeatletter @@ -135,7 +136,6 @@ \makeatother \usepackage{array,longtable} -\usepackage{ifluatex,ifxetex} \ifnum 0\ifluatex 1\else\ifxetex 1\fi\fi=0 % \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}% \usepackage{lmodern}% @@ -166,13 +166,17 @@ \makeatletter \@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{% +\author{Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)\and + Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)\and + The \LaTeX3 Project (\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues})} }{% \usepackage{bmhydoc}% +\author{Sebastian Rahtz\thanks{deceased}\and + Heiko Oberdiek\thanks{inactive}\and + The \LaTeX3 Project\thanks{\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues}}} } \makeatother - \title{Hypertext marks in \hologo{LaTeX}: a manual for \xpackage{hyperref}} -\author{Sebastian Rahtz \and Heiko Oberdiek} \date{\mydate} \begin{document} @@ -186,7 +190,7 @@ \section{Introduction} The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the Hyper\hologo{TeX} -project, described at \url{http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/}. It extends +project, described at \texttt{http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/}\footnote{Now: \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/support/hypertex/hypertex}}. It extends the functionality of all the \hologo{LaTeX} cross-referencing commands (including the table of contents, bibliographies etc) to produce \cs{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; @@ -391,7 +395,7 @@ as they default to the value true if used. These are the ones classed as Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size. \medskip -\noindent\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} +\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} draft & boolean & false & all hypertext options are turned off \\ final & boolean & true & all hypertext options are turned on \\ debug & boolean & false & extra diagnostic messages are printed in \\ @@ -540,7 +544,7 @@ if the destination is not yet renamed: Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \cs{hypertarget}. \medskip -\noindent\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} +\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} destlabel & boolean & false & destinations are named by first \cs{label}\\ & & & after anchor creation\\ hypertexnames & boolean & true & use guessable names for links \\ @@ -551,7 +555,7 @@ plainpages & boolean & false & Forces page anchors to be named by the Arabic \subsection{Configuration options} -\noindent\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7cm}} +\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{9cm}} raiselinks & boolean & true & In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally calculated by the driver as simply the base line of contained text; this options forces \verb|\special| commands to reflect the real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) \\ @@ -608,7 +612,7 @@ textures & For use with \textsf{Textures} \\ vtex & For use with MicroPress' \textsf{VTeX}; the PDF and HTML backends are detected automatically. \\ vtexpdfmark & For use with \textsf{VTeX}'s PostScript backend. \\ -xetex & For use with Xe\TeX (using backend for dvipdfm). +xetex & For use with Xe\TeX\ (using backend for dvipdfm). \end{longtable} \smallskip @@ -624,7 +628,7 @@ Explorer might add something like this to hyperref.cfg: \end{verbatim} \subsection{Extension options} -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{5.5cm}@{}} +\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{8cm}@{}} extension & text & & Set the file extension (e.g.\ \textsf{dvi}) which will be appended to file links created if you use the \xpackage{xr} package. \\ hyperfigures & boolean & & \\ @@ -635,7 +639,7 @@ backref & text & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each ite pagebackref & boolean & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of page numbers. \\ hyperindex & boolean & true & Makes the page numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on unique - page anchors (\verb|pageanchor|, \ldots)\\ + page anchors (\verb|pageanchor|, \ldots) \verb|pageanchors| and \verb|plainpages=false|. \\ hyperfootnotes & boolean & true & Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the footnote text. Easily broken \ldots\\ @@ -665,7 +669,7 @@ Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard \LaTeX\ \xpackage{color} package. \subsection{PDF-specific display options} -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7.5cm}@{}} +\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7.6cm}@{}} bookmarks & boolean & true & A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the table of contents, requiring two passes of \LaTeX. Some postprocessing of the bookmark file (file extension \texttt{.out}) may be needed to @@ -726,57 +730,83 @@ next \TeX\ run if it is edited to contain the line \subsection{PDF display and information options} \begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\raggedright}p{\widthof{key value}}>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}} baseurl & URL & & Sets the base URL of the PDF document \\ -pdfpagemode & text & empty & Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are - \texttt{UseNone}, \texttt{UseThumbs} (show thumbnails), \texttt{UseOutlines} - (show bookmarks), \texttt{FullScreen}, \texttt{UseOC} (PDF 1.5), - and \texttt{UseAttachments} (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the - bookmarks option is set, \texttt{UseOutlines} is used. \\ +pdfpagemode & name & empty & Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are + \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseThumbs| (show thumbnails), \verb|UseOutlines| + (show bookmarks), \verb|FullScreen|, \verb|UseOC| (PDF 1.5), + and \verb|UseAttachments| (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the + bookmarks option is set, \verb|UseOutlines| is used. \\ pdftitle & text & & Sets the document information Title field \\ pdfauthor & text & & Sets the document information Author field \\ pdfsubject & text & & Sets the document information Subject field \\ pdfcreator & text & & Sets the document information Creator field \\ addtopdfproducer & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Producer field \\ pdfkeywords & text & & Sets the document information Keywords field \\ -pdftrapped & text & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry.\\ -&&& Possible values are \texttt{True}, \texttt{False} and \texttt{Unknown}.\\ -&&& An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ -pdfinfo & key value list & empty & Alternative interface for setting the - document information.\\ -pdfview & text & XYZ & Sets the default PDF `view' for each link \\ -pdfstartpage & text & 1 & Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. \\ -pdfstartview & text & Fit & Set the startup page view \\ -pdfremotestartview & text & Fit & Set the startup page view of remote PDF files \\ +pdftrapped & name & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are \verb|True|, \verb|False| and \verb|Unknown|. + An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ +% +pdfinfo & key value list & empty & Alternative interface for setting the + document information.\\ +pdfview & name & XYZ & Sets the default PDF `view' for each link \\ +pdfstartpage & integer & 1 & Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. \\ +pdfstartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view \\ +pdfremotestartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view of remote PDF files \\ pdfpagescrop & n n n n & & Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This should be a set of four numbers \\ pdfcenterwindow & boolean & false & position the document window in the center of the screen \\ -pdfdirection & text & empty & direction setting \\ -pdfdisplaydoctitle & boolean & false & display document title instead of - file name in title bar\\ -pdfduplex & text & empty & paper handling option for print dialog\\ +pdfdirection & name & empty & direction setting. Possible values: \verb|L2R| (left to right) and + \verb|R2L| (right to left)\\ +pdfdisplaydoctitle & boolean & false & display document title instead of file name in title bar\\ +pdfduplex & name & empty & paper handling option for print dialog. Possible vatues are: + \verb|Simplex| (print single-sided), + \verb|DuplexFlipShortEdge| (duplex and flip on the short edge of the sheet), + \verb|DuplexFlipLongEdge| (duplex and flip on the long edge of the sheet)\\ + pdffitwindow & boolean & false & resize document window to fit document size \\ -pdflang & text & relax & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)\\ +pdflang & name & relax & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)\\ pdfmenubar & boolean & true & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\ pdfnewwindow & boolean & false & make links that open another PDF file start a new window \\ pdfnonfullscreenpagemode - & text & empty & page mode setting on exiting - full-screen mode\\ + & name & empty & page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. Possible values are + \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseOutlines|, \verb|UseThumbs|, and \verb|UseOC|\\ pdfnumcopies & integer & empty & number of printed copies \\ -pdfpagelayout & text & empty & set layout of PDF pages \\ +pdfpagelayout & name & empty & set layout of PDF pages. Possible values: + \verb|SinglePage|, \verb|OneColumn|, + \verb|TwoColumnLeft|, \verb|TwoColumnRight|, + \verb|TwoPageLeft|, and \verb|TwoPageRight| \\ pdfpagelabels & boolean & true & set PDF page labels \\ -pdfpagetransition & text & empty & set PDF page transition style \\ -pdfpicktraybypdfsize & text & empty & set option for print dialog \\ -pdfprintarea & text & empty & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences \\ -pdfprintclip & text & empty & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences \\ +pdfpagetransition & name & empty & set PDF page transition style. Possible values are + \verb|Split|, \verb|Blinds|, \verb|Box|, \verb|Wipe|, + \verb|Dissolve|, \verb|Glitter|, \verb|R|, + \verb|Fly|, \verb|Push|, + \verb|Cover|, \verb|Uncover|, + \verb|Fade|. + The default according to the PDF~Reference is \verb|R|, + which simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\ +pdfpicktraybypdfsize + & boolean & false & specify whether PDF page size is used to select input paper tray in print dialog \\ +pdfprintarea & name & empty & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are + \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, + \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. + The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ +pdfprintclip & name & empty & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible values are + \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, + \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. + The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ pdfprintpagerange & n n (n n)* - & empty & set /PrintPageRange of viewer - preferences\\ -pdfprintscaling & text & empty & page scaling option for print dialog + & empty & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences\\ +pdfprintscaling & name & empty & page scaling option for print dialog (option /PrintScaling of viewer preferences, PDF 1.6); - valid values are \texttt{None} and - \texttt{AppDefault} \\ + valid values are \verb|None| and + \verb|AppDefault| \\ pdftoolbar & boolean & true & make PDF toolbar visible \\ -pdfviewarea & text & empty & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences \\ -pdfviewclip & text & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences \\ +pdfviewarea & name & empty & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are + \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, + \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. + The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ +pdfviewclip & name & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible values are + \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, + \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. + The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ pdfwindowui & boolean & true & make PDF user interface elements visible \\ unicode & boolean & false & Unicode encoded PDF strings \end{longtable} @@ -830,7 +860,21 @@ Box & /M & A box sweeps in or out. \\ Dissolve & & The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page. \\ Glitter & /Di & Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen. \\ Split & /Dm /M & Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page. \\ -Wipe & /Di & A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page. +Wipe & /Di & A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page. \\ +R & & Simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\ +Fly & /Di /M & Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the direction + specified by /Di, to or from a location that is + offscreen except when /Di is None. \\ +Push & /Di & The old page slides off the screen while the new page slides in, + pushing the old page out in the direction + specified by /Di. \\ +Cover & /Di & The new page slides on to the screen in the direction specified + by /Di, covering the old page. \\ +Uncover & /Di & The old page slides off the screen in the direction specified by + /Di, uncovering the new page in the direction + specified by /Di. \\ +Fade & & The new page gradually becomes visible through the old one. + \end{longtable} \subsection{Option \texttt{pdfinfo}} @@ -863,6 +907,8 @@ The following is a complete listing of available options for \textsf{hyperref}, arranged alphabetically. \begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{7cm}@{}} +allbordercolors & & Set all border color options\\ +allcolors & & Set all color options (without border and field options)\\ anchorcolor & \textit{black} & set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers. \\ backref & \textit{false} & do bibliographical back references \\ baseurl & \textit{empty} & set base URL for document \\ @@ -880,6 +926,7 @@ colorlinks & \textit{false} & color links \\ debug & \textit{false} & provide details of anchors defined; same as verbose \\ destlabel & \textit{false} & destinations are named by the first \verb|\label| after the anchor creation \\ draft & \textit{false} & do not do any hyperlinking \\ +driverfallback & & default if no driver specified or detected\\ dvipdfm & & use \textsf{dvipdfm} backend \\ dvipdfmx & & use \textsf{dvipdfmx} backend \\ dvips & & use \textsf{dvips} backend \\ @@ -891,6 +938,7 @@ filebordercolor & \textit{0 .5 .5} & color of border around file links filecolor & \textit{cyan} & color of file links \\ final & \textit{true} & opposite of option draft \\ frenchlinks & \textit{false} & use small caps instead of color for links \\ +hidelinks & & Hide links (removing color and border) \\ hyperfigures & \textit{false} & make figures hyper links \\ hyperfootnotes & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked footnotes \\ hyperindex & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked indices \\ @@ -912,6 +960,7 @@ pagebackref & \textit{false} & backreference by page number \\ pdfauthor & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Author field \\ pdfborder & \textit{0 0 1} & width of PDF link border \\ & \textit{0 0 0} & (\texttt{colorlinks)} \\ +pdfborderstyle & & border style for links \\ pdfcenterwindow & \textit{false} & position the document window in the center of the screen \\ pdfcreator & \textit{LaTeX with} & text for PDF Creator field \\ & \textit{hyperref} & \\ @@ -933,9 +982,9 @@ pdfnonfullscreenpagemode & \textit{empty} & page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode\\ pdfnumcopies & \textit{empty} & number of printed copies\\ +pdfpagelabels & \textit{true} & set PDF page labels \\ pdfpagelayout & \textit{empty} & set layout of PDF pages \\ pdfpagemode & \textit{empty} & set default mode of PDF display \\ -pdfpagelabels & \textit{true} & set PDF page labels \\ pdfpagescrop & \textit{empty} & set crop size of PDF document \\ pdfpagetransition & \textit{empty} & set PDF page transition style \\ pdfpicktraybypdfsize @@ -961,6 +1010,7 @@ pdfviewclip & \textit{empty} & set /ViewClip of viewer preference pdfwindowui & \textit{true} & make PDF user interface elements visible \\ plainpages & \textit{false} & do page number anchors as plain Arabic \\ ps2pdf & & use \textsf{ps2pdf} backend \\ +psdextra & \textit{false} & define more short names for PDF string commands \\ raiselinks & \textit{false} & raise up links (for \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend) \\ runbordercolor & \textit{0 .7 .7} & color of border around `run' links \\ runcolor & \textit{filecolor} & color of `run' links\\ @@ -1652,7 +1702,7 @@ sequence error would arise. suffix_2p "\\nohyperpage{f.}" suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}" \end{verbatim} - (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space "\verb|\\|," or "\verb|~|" + (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space ``\verb|\\|,'' or ``\verb|~|'' should be put before the first f inside \verb|\nohyperpage|.) @@ -1668,7 +1718,7 @@ sequence error would arise. \item The option must be given for package loading: \verb|\usepackage[ocgcolorlinks]{hyperref}| \item Main disadvantage: Links cannot be broken across lines. - PDF reference 1.7: 4.10.2 "Making Graphical Content Optional": + PDF reference 1.7: 4.10.2 ``Making Graphical Content Optional'': Graphics state operations, such as setting the color, ..., are still applied. Therefore the link text is put in a box and set twice, with and @@ -1730,16 +1780,16 @@ sequence error would arise. Before 6.77b: \begin{itemize} - \item pdfnewwindow=true --> /NewWindow true - \item pdfnewwindow=false --> (absent) - \item unused pdfnewwindow --> (absent) + \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true + \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ (absent) + \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent) \end{itemize} Since 6.77b: \begin{itemize} - \item pdfnewwindow=true --> /NewWindow true - \item pdfnewwindow=false --> /NewWindow false - \item pdfnewwindow={} --> (absent) - \item unused pdfnewwindow --> (absent) + \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true + \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow false + \item pdfnewwindow={} $\rightarrow$ (absent) + \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent) \end{itemize} @@ -1861,8 +1911,8 @@ sequence error would arise. but this is not generally supported. \begin{itemize} \item pdfTeX below 1.10a: unsupported. - pdfTeX >= 1.10a and < 1.30: \verb|\pdfoptionpdfminorversion| - pdfTeX >= 1.30: \verb|\pdfminorversion| + pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a and < 1.30: \verb|\pdfoptionpdfminorversion| + pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.30: \verb|\pdfminorversion| \item dvipdfm: configuration file, example: TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/config/config, entry `V 2'. \item dvipdfmx: configuration file, example: @@ -1873,7 +1923,7 @@ sequence error would arise. The current PDF version is used as default if this version - can be detected (only pdfTeX >= 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest + can be detected (only pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest version 1.2 is assumed. Thus `hyperref' tries to avoid PDF code that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF features. @@ -1898,17 +1948,17 @@ sequence error would arise. The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries in the information dictionary: PDFDocEncoding and Unicode - as UTF-16BE. Option "pdfencoding" selects between these encodings: + as UTF-16BE. Option \xoption{pdfencoding} selects between these encodings: \begin{itemize} - \item "pdfdoc" uses PDFDocEncoding. It uses just one byte per character, + \item \xoption{pdfdoc} uses PDFDocEncoding. It uses just one byte per character, but the supported characters are limited (244 in PDF-1.7). - \item "unicode" sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes + \item \xoption{unicode} sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes are used for most characters, surrogates need four bytes. - \item "auto" PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters + \item \xoption{auto} PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters outside the encoding and Unicode otherwise. \end{itemize} - The luatex driver uses "unicode" by default. If another encoding should be forced, + The luatex driver uses \xoption{unicode} by default. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done in \verb|hypersetup|. \subsection{Color options/package hycolor} @@ -1932,21 +1982,21 @@ sequence error would arise. \subsection{Link border style} Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or - options "colorlinks", "frenchlinks". This is done by option + options \xoption{colorlinks}, \xoption{frenchlinks}. This is done by option \verb|pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1}| Some remarks: \begin{itemize} \item AR7/Linux seems to have a bug, that don't use the default - value "1" for the width, but zero, thus that the underline - is not visible without "/W 1". The same applies for + value \verb"1" for the width, but zero, thus that the underline + is not visible without \verb"/W 1". The same applies for dashed boxes, eg.: pdfborderstyle={/S/D/D[3 2]/W 1} \item The syntax is described in the PDF specification, look for - "border style", eg. - Table 8.13 "Entries in a border style dictionary" + ``border style'', eg. + Table 8.13 ``Entries in a border style dictionary'' (specification for version 1.6) \item The border style is removed by @@ -1958,9 +2008,9 @@ sequence error would arise. Some support: \begin{itemize} - \item AR7/Linux: "underline" and "dashed", but the border width + \item AR7/Linux: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}, but the border width must be given. - \item xpdf 3.00: "underline" and "dashed" + \item xpdf 3.00: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed} \end{itemize} Unsupported: @@ -1970,22 +2020,22 @@ sequence error would arise. \end{itemize} \end{itemize} -\subsection{Option "bookmarksdepth"} +\subsection{Option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}} The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new - option "bookmarksdepth". The option acts globally and + option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}. The option acts globally and distinguishes three cases: \begin{itemize} - \item "bookmarksdepth" without value - Then hyperref uses the current value of counter "tocdepth". + \item \xoption{bookmarksdepth} without value + Then hyperref uses the current value of counter \xoption{tocdepth}. This is the compatible behaviour and the default. - \item "bookmarksdepth=", the value is number (also negative): + \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=", the value is number (also negative): The depth for the bookmarks are set to this number. - \item "bookmarksdepth=" + \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=" The is a document division name (part, chapter, ...). It must not start with a digit or minus to avoid mixing up with the number case. Internally hyperref uses the value - of macro "\verb|\toclevel@|". + of macro \verb|\toclevel@|. Examples: \begin{verbatim} \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=paragraph} @@ -1994,7 +2044,7 @@ sequence error would arise. \end{verbatim} \end{itemize} -\subsection{Option "pdfescapeform"} +\subsection{Option \xoption{pdfescapeform}} There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form @@ -2023,17 +2073,17 @@ sequence error would arise. \subsection{Default driver setting} - (hyperref >= 6.72s) + (hyperref $\ge$ 6.72s) If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the - most suitable driver. Thus it loads "hpdftex", if pdfTeX is + most suitable driver. Thus it loads \xoption{hpdftex}, if pdfTeX is detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the corresponding VTeX driver for VTeX's working modes. Unhappily many driver programs run after the TeX compiler, so hyperref does not have a chance (dvips, dvipdfm, ...). - In this case driver "hypertex" is loaded that supports the + In this case driver \xoption{hypertex} is loaded that supports the HyperTeX features that are recognized by xdvi for example. This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configuration - file "hyperref.cfg": + file \verb"hyperref.cfg": \begin{verbatim} \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips} \end{verbatim} @@ -2424,7 +2474,7 @@ Currently only package loading orders are available: -Note: hyperref loads package "nameref" at \verb|\begin{document}|. +Note: hyperref loads package \xpackage{nameref} at \verb|\begin{document}|. Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded earlier. @@ -2568,7 +2618,7 @@ earlier. \usepackage{hyperref} \usepackage{dblaccnt} \end{verbatim} - or see entry for "vietnam". + or see entry for \xoption{vietnam}. \subsubsection{easyeqn} @@ -2610,7 +2660,7 @@ earlier. \subsubsection{footnote} This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref's footnote - support by using option "hyperfootnotes=false". + support by using option \verb"hyperfootnotes=false". \subsubsection{geometry} @@ -2651,12 +2701,12 @@ earlier. \subsubsection{IEEEtran.cls} - version >= V1.6b (because of \verb|\@makecaption|, see ChangeLog) + version $\ge$ V1.6b (because of \verb|\@makecaption|, see ChangeLog) \subsubsection{index} - version >= 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \verb|\addcontentsline| redefinition) + version $\ge$ 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \verb|\addcontentsline| redefinition) \subsubsection{lastpage} @@ -2816,7 +2866,7 @@ For equations the following might work: \subsubsection{titlesec} - "nameref" supports titlesec, but hyperref does not + \xpackage{nameref} supports titlesec, but hyperref does not (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones). @@ -2828,7 +2878,7 @@ For equations the following might work: for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence. However this makes the first call non-expandable and will break if used in information entries or bookmarks. - Package "ucs" offers \verb|\PrerenderUnicode| or \verb|\PreloadUnicodePage| + Package \xpackage{ucs} offers \verb|\PrerenderUnicode| or \verb|\PreloadUnicodePage| to solve this: \begin{verbatim} \usepackage{ucs} @@ -2945,7 +2995,7 @@ For equations the following might work: hyperref already provides PDF strings encoded in UTF-16BE, thus the result is a warning - "Failed to convert input string to UTF16..." + \verb"Failed to convert input string to UTF16..." The best way would be, if xdvipdfm could detect the byte order marker (\verb|\376\377|) and skips the conversion @@ -2959,7 +3009,7 @@ For equations the following might work: Two versions of \verb|\pdfstringdef| are needed: a) The string is converted back to big characters for - the "tainted keys" of xdvipdfmx (\verb|spc_pdfm.c: default_taintkeys|). + the ``tainted key'' of xdvipdfmx (\verb|spc_pdfm.c: default_taintkeys|). The subset hyperref uses is /Title, /Author, /Subject, /Keywords, /Creator, /Producer, /T. Any changes of this set in xdvipdfmx cannot be detected by hyperref. @@ -2971,7 +3021,7 @@ For equations the following might work: Thus \textbf{each} application that uses \verb|\pdfstringdef| now must check, if it defines a string for some of the tained keys. If yes, then the call of \verb|\pdfstringdef| should be preceded - by "\verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname|". + by \verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname|. Example: package bookmark. @@ -2986,20 +3036,20 @@ For equations the following might work: Workarounds: \begin{itemize} \item For long section or caption titles in the table of contents - or list of figures/tables option "linktocpage" can be used. + or list of figures/tables option \xoption{linktocpage} can be used. Then the page number will be a link, and the overlong section title is not forced into an one line link with overfull \verb|\hbox| warning. -\item "\verb|\url|"s are caught by package "breakurl". -\item The option "breaklinks" is intended for internal use. But it +\item ``\verb|\url|''s are caught by package \xpackage{breakurl}. +\item The option \xoption{breaklinks} is intended for internal use. But it can be used to force link wrapping, e.g. when printing a document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF and viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be misplaced. - Another limitation: some penalties are "optimized" by TeX, + Another limitation: some penalties are ``optimized'' by TeX, thus there are missing break points, especially within - \verb|\url|. (See thread "hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2" + \verb|\url|. (See thread ``hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2'' in comp.text.tex 2005-09). \end{itemize} @@ -3054,8 +3104,8 @@ For equations the following might work: Alternatively, LaTeX's option handling system can be adapted - to key value options by one of the packages "kvoptions-patch" - (from project "kvoptions") or "xkvltxp" (from project "xsetkeys"). + to key value options by one of the packages \xpackage{kvoptions-patch} + (from project \xpackage{kvoptions}) or \xpackage{xkvltxp} (from project \xpackage{xsetkeys}). \subsection{Index with makeindex} @@ -3069,7 +3119,7 @@ For equations the following might work: in arabic form. If the page numbers in other formats are used (book class with \verb|\frontmatter|, \verb|\romannumbering|, ...), then the page anchors are not unique. Therefore option - "plainpages=false" is recommended. + \verb"plainpages=false" is recommended. \item The encap mechanism of Makeindex allows to use one command only (see documentation of Makeindex). If the user sets such a command, hyperref suppresses its @@ -3085,14 +3135,14 @@ For equations the following might work: \end{verbatim} \item Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use package robustindex with hyperindex=false. - \item Other encap characters can be set by option "encap". - Example for use of "?": + \item Other encap characters can be set by option \xoption{encap}. + Example for use of ``?'': \begin{verbatim} \usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref} \end{verbatim} - \item An other possibility is the insertion of \verb|\hyperpage| by + \item Another possibility is the insertion of \verb|\hyperpage| by a style file for makeindex. For this case, hyperref's - insertion will be disabled by "hyperindex=false". + insertion will be disabled by \verb"hyperindex=false". \verb|\hyperpage| will be defined regardless of setting of hyperindex. \begin{verbatim} %%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%% @@ -3108,7 +3158,7 @@ encap_suffix "}" \end{verbatim} \end{itemize} -\subsection{Warning "bookmark level for unknown defaults to 0"} +\subsection{Warning \texttt{"bookmark level for unknown defaults to 0"}} Getting rid of it: \begin{verbatim} @@ -3123,7 +3173,7 @@ encap_suffix "}" place where hyperref set the corresponding anchor. Unhappily the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not visible if a link jumps to a figure. - In this case, try package "hypcap.sty" that implements + In this case, try package \xpackage{hypcap} that implements a method to circumvent the problem. @@ -3161,7 +3211,7 @@ Support for additional unicode characters: 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, - this is marked by "9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in + this is marked by \verb"9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in octal numbers): \begin{verbatim} @@ -3169,7 +3219,7 @@ Support for additional unicode characters: \036\241 -> \9036\241 \end{verbatim} - Optional: "8" is used for abbreviations: + Optional: \verb"8" is used for abbreviations: \begin{verbatim} \900 = \80, \901 = \81, \902 = \82, ... @@ -3193,7 +3243,7 @@ Support for additional unicode characters: The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext| out of order or reusing \verb|\footnotemark|. Here you can either disable hyperref's footnote - support by "hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros, + support by \verb"hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros, nasty examples: \begin{verbatim} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/options.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/options.tex deleted file mode 100644 index d3e9d64d379..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/doc/options.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{article} -\usepackage{geometry} -\geometry{ - includefoot, - hmargin=10mm, - vmargin=15mm, -} -\usepackage{array} -\usepackage{longtable} -\usepackage{ifluatex,ifxetex} -\ifnum 0\ifluatex 1\else\ifxetex 1\fi\fi=0 % - \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}% -\else - \usepackage{fontspec}% - \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}% -\fi -\title{hyperref package options} -\author{Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek et al.} -\date{July 28th 2012}% HO -\newcommand{\optempty}{{\rmfamily\textit{empty}}} -\newcommand{\optrelax}{{\rmfamily\textit{relax}}} -\newcommand*{\for}[1]{{\rmfamily(#1)}} -\begin{document} -\maketitle -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{70mm}>{\ttfamily}l@{}} -\hline -allbordercolors &set all border color options&\\ -allcolors &set all color options (without border and field options)&\\ -anchorcolor &set color of anchors&black\\ -backref &do bibliographical back references&false\\ -baseurl &set base URL for document&\optempty\\ -bookmarks &make bookmarks&true\\ -bookmarksnumbered &put section numbers in bookmarks&false\\ -bookmarksopen &open up bookmark tree&false\\ -bookmarksopenlevel &level to which bookmarks are open&\string\maxdimen\\ -bookmarkstype &to specify which `toc' file to mimic&toc\\ -breaklinks &allow links to break over lines&false\\ -citebordercolor &color of border around cites& 0 1 0\\ -citecolor &color of citation links&green\\ -colorlinks &color links&false\\ -&&true \for{tex4ht, dviwindo}\\ -debug &provide details of anchors defined&false\\ -destlabel &destinations are named by the first \verb|\label| after the anchor creation&false\\ -&same as verbose&\\ -draft &do not do any hyper linking&false\\ -driverfallback &Use this driver option, if no driver is given and cannot be autodetected\\ -dvipdfm &use dvipdfm backend\\ -dvipdfmx &use dvipdfmx backend (dvipdfm)\\ -dvips &use dvips backend\\ -dvipsone &use dvipsone backend\\ -dviwindo &use dviwindo backend\\ -encap &to set encap character for hyperindex\\ -extension &suffix of linked files&dvi\\ -filebordercolor &color of border around file links& 0 .5 .5\\ -filecolor &color of file links&cyan\\ -final &opposite of option draft&true\\ -frenchlinks &use small caps instead of color for links&false\\ -hidelinks&hide links (no color, no border)&\\ -hyperfigures &make figures hyper links&false\\ -hyperfootnotes &set up hyperlinked footnotes&true\\ -hyperindex &set up hyperlinked indices&true\\ -hypertex &use HyperTeX backend\\ -hypertexnames &use guessable names for links&true\\ -implicit &redefine \LaTeX\ internals&true\\ -latex2html &use \LaTeX2HTML backend\\ -linkbordercolor &color of border around links& 1 0 0\\ -linkcolor &color of links&red\\ -linktocpage &make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT&false\\ -menubordercolor &color of border around menu links& 1 0 0\\ -menucolor &color for menu links&red\\ -naturalnames &use \LaTeX-computed names for links&false\\ -nesting &allow nesting of links&false\\ -pageanchor &put an anchor on every page&true\\ -pagebackref &backreference by page number&false\\ -pdfauthor &text for PDF Author field&\optempty\\ -pdfborder &width of PDF link border&0 0 1\\ -&&0 0 0 \for{colorlinks}\\ -pdfcenterwindow &position the document window center of the screen&false\\ -pdfcreator &text for PDF Creator field&LaTeX with hyperref package\\ -pdfdirection & direction setting & \optempty\\ -pdfdisplaydoctitle &display document title instead of file name in title bar&false\\ -pdfduplex &paper handling option for print dialog& \optempty\\ -pdffitwindow &resize document window to fit document size&false\\ -pdfhighlight &set highlighting of PDF links& /I\\ -pdfinfo & alternative interface for document information & \optempty\\ -pdfkeywords &text for PDF Keywords field&\optempty\\ -pdflang &PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)&\optrelax\\ -pdfmenubar &make PDF viewer's menu bar visible&true\\ -pdfnewwindow &make links that open another PDF file start a new window&false\\ -pdfnonfullscreenpagemode &page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode&\optempty\\ -pdfnumcopies &number of printed copies&\optempty\\ -pdfpagelayout &set layout of PDF pages&\optempty\\ -pdfpagemode &set default mode of PDF display&\optempty\\ -pdfpagelabels &set PDF page labels&false\\ -pdfpagescrop &set crop size of PDF document&\optempty\\ -pdfpagetransition &set PDF page transition style&\optempty\\ -pdfpicktrackbypdfsize &set option for print dialog&\optempty\\ -pdfprintarea &set /PrintArea of viewer preferences&\optempty\\ -pdfprintclip &set /PrintClip of viewer preferences&\optempty\\ -pdfprintpagerange &set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences&\optempty\\ -pdfprintscaling &page scaling option for print dialog&\optempty\\ -pdfproducer &text for PDF Producer field&\optempty\\ -pdfremotestartview & starting view for links into remote PDF documents&Fit\\ -pdftrapped & set the document information Trapped entry&\optempty\\ -pdfstartpage &page at which PDF document opens&1\\ -pdfstartview &starting view of PDF document& Fit\\ -pdfsubject &text for PDF Subject field&\optempty\\ -pdftex &use pdf\TeX\ backend\\ -pdftitle &text for PDF Title field&\optempty\\ -pdftoolbar &make PDF toolbar visible&true\\ -pdfview &PDF `view' when on link traversal&\optempty\\ -pdfviewarea &set /ViewArea of viewer preferences&\optempty\\ -pdfviewclip &set /ViewClip of viewer preferences&\optempty\\ -pdfwindowui &make PDF user interface elements visible&true\\ -plainpages &do page number anchors as plain arabic&true\\ -ps2pdf &use ps2pdf backend\\ -raiselinks &raise up links (for HyperTeX backend)&false\\ -runbordercolor &color of border around `run' links& 0 .7 .7\\ -runcolor & color of `run' links& filecolor\\ -setpagesize &set page size by special driver commands&true\\ -tex4ht &use \TeX4ht backend\\ -textures &use Textures backend\\ -unicode &Unicode encoded pdf strings\\ -urlbordercolor &color of border around URL links& 0 1 1\\ -urlcolor &color of URL links&magenta\\ -verbose &be chatty&false\\ -vtex &use V\TeX\ backend\\ -vtexpdfmark &use backend for V\TeX\ in PDF/PS mode (pdfmark specials)\\ -xetex &use XeTeX backend (dvipdfm)\\ -\hline -\end{longtable} -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hluatex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hluatex.dtx index 6d94245ef31..52f1c0ebae3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hluatex.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hluatex.dtx @@ -143,13 +143,15 @@ } \edef\Hy@pdfminorversion{\pdfvariable minorversion}% - \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion<5 % +\edef\Hy@pdfmajorversion{\pdfvariable majorversion}% + +\ifHy@ocgcolorlinks + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version<105 % \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.5}% \fi \fi \ifHy@setpdfversion - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@IfUndefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \ifHy@verbose @@ -157,13 +159,13 @@ PDF object streams are disabled, because they are% \MessageBreak not supported in requested PDF version % - 1.\Hy@pdfversion + \Hy@pdf@majorversion.\Hy@pdf@minorversion }% \fi \pdfobjcompresslevel=\ltx@zero }% \fi - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version=\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version\relax \else \let\Hy@temp\ltx@empty \def\Hy@temp@A#1#2{% @@ -186,10 +188,11 @@ \Hy@temp@A\pdflastlink{link}% }% \ifx\Hy@temp\ltx@empty - \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion\relax + \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax \else \let\Hy@temp@A\ltx@empty - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion=4 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version=104 % \IfFileExists{pdf14.sty}{% \def\Hy@temp@A{% \MessageBreak @@ -207,9 +210,10 @@ The version should be set as early as possible:% \MessageBreak \space\space - \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion, % + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion \string\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@ifundefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \MessageBreak @@ -222,11 +226,13 @@ \fi \fi \PackageInfo{hyperref}{% + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion.% \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion - :=\number\Hy@pdfversion\space + :=\number\Hy@pdf@majorversion.\number\Hy@pdf@minorversion\space }% \fi - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@majorversion{\number\Hy@pdfmajorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@minorversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks @@ -1353,7 +1359,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.dtx index 0a1965bfd7f..67860c979c1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.dtx @@ -1,9 +1,10 @@ % \iffalse -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -49,7 +50,7 @@ %\ProvidesFile{puvnenc.def} %\ProvidesFile{puarenc.def} %\ProvidesFile{psdextra.def} -% [2019/11/10 v7.00c % +% [2020/01/14 v7.00d % % Hypertext links for LaTeX] % Dummy hyperref (SR)] % Hyperref documentation driver file] @@ -5280,22 +5281,43 @@ \@ifundefined{Hy@pdfversion@#1}{% \PackageWarning{hyperref}{% Unsupported PDF version `#1'.\MessageBreak - Valid values: 1.2 until 1.9% + Valid values: 1.2-1.7, 2.0% }% }{% \Hy@setpdfversiontrue - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\@nameuse{Hy@pdfversion@#1}}% + \@nameuse{Hy@pdfversion@#1}% }% } -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.2}{2}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.3}{3}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.4}{4}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.5}{5}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.6}{6}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.7}{7}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.8}{8}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.9}{9}% -\def\Hy@pdfversion{5} +% \end{macrocode} +% \verb|\Hy@pdfminorversion| already used elsewhere to denote \verb|\pdfminorversion| +% or \verb|\pdfvariable majorversion}| so introduce new names here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.2}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{2}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.3}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{3}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.4}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{4}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.5}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{5}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.6}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{6}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.7}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{7}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@2.0}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{2}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{0}}% +\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{5} +% \end{macrocode} +% Legacy name, earlier releases assumed 1.x +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\Hy@pdfversion\Hy@pdf@minorversion +\def\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version{\numexpr100*\Hy@pdf@majorversion+\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax} +\def\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version{\numexpr100*\Hy@pdfmajorversion+\Hy@pdfminorversion\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% if \verb|pdfminorversion| is defined, make sure \verb|pdfmajorversion| is too. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{pdfminorversion}{}{% +\@ifundefined{pdfmajorversion}{% +\newcount\pdfmajorversion +\pdfmajorversion=1 +}{}% +} +\ifx\pdfmajorversion\@undefined\else +\def\Hy@pdfmajorversion{\pdfmajorversion} +\fi % \end{macrocode} % % \section{Options for different drivers}\label{drivers} @@ -7201,7 +7223,7 @@ % % \begin{macrocode} \ifHy@pdfa - \ifnum \Hy@pdfversion < 4 + \ifnum \Hy@pdf@majorminor@version< 104 \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.4}% \fi \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% @@ -7444,7 +7466,7 @@ \ifx\HyOpt@CustomDriver\ltx@empty \ifx\Hy@driver\@empty \def\HyOpt@DriverType{ (autodetected)}% - \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}% + \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}% \ifpdf \ifx\pdfextension\@undefined \def\Hy@driver{hpdftex}% @@ -9124,7 +9146,7 @@ \kv@parse{#1}{% \Hy@pdfstringdef\kv@key\kv@key \ifx\kv@value\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<3 % implementation note 122, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<103 % implementation note 122, PDF spec 1.7 \xdef\Fld@choices{\Fld@choices[(\kv@key)(\kv@key)]}% \else \xdef\Fld@choices{\Fld@choices(\kv@key)}% @@ -13668,12 +13690,12 @@ }% }{% \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version<105 % \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.5}% \fi \fi \ifHy@setpdfversion - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@IfUndefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \ifHy@verbose @@ -13681,13 +13703,13 @@ PDF object streams are disabled, because they are% \MessageBreak not supported in requested PDF version % - 1.\Hy@pdfversion + \Hy@pdf@majorversion.\Hy@pdf@minorversion }% \fi \pdfobjcompresslevel=\ltx@zero }% \fi - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version=\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version\relax \else \let\Hy@temp\ltx@empty \def\Hy@temp@A#1#2{% @@ -13710,10 +13732,11 @@ \Hy@temp@A\pdflastlink{link}% }% \ifx\Hy@temp\ltx@empty - \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion\relax + \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax \else \let\Hy@temp@A\ltx@empty - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion=4 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version=104 % \IfFileExists{pdf14.sty}{% \def\Hy@temp@A{% \MessageBreak @@ -13731,9 +13754,10 @@ The version should be set as early as possible:% \MessageBreak \space\space - \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion, % + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion \string\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@ifundefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \MessageBreak @@ -13746,11 +13770,13 @@ \fi \fi \PackageInfo{hyperref}{% + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion.% \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion - :=\number\Hy@pdfversion\space + :=\number\Hy@pdf@majorversion.\number\Hy@pdf@minorversion\space }% \fi - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@majorversion{\number\Hy@pdfmajorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@minorversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% } \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% % \end{macrocode} @@ -17218,18 +17244,31 @@ % \begin{macrocode} /DvipsToPDF{72.27 mul Resolution div} def% /PDFToDvips{72.27 div Resolution mul} def% - /BPToDvips{72 div Resolution mul}def% + /BPToDvips{72 div Resolution mul}def % \end{macrocode} -% The values inside the /Boder array are not taken literally, but +% The values inside the /Border array are not taken literally, but % interpreted by ghostscript using the resolution of the dvi driver. % I don't know how other distiller programs behaves in this manner. +% +% Note GhostScript changed its behaviour here and later versions do +% not need this scaling, so test the PostScript interpreter is GhostScript +% and if so check its version. +% +% If using gs and release $>$ 9.27 no-op, otherwise patch. % \begin{macrocode} - /BorderArrayPatch{% - [exch{% - dup dup type/integertype eq exch type/realtype eq or% - {BPToDvips}if% - }forall]% - }def% + product (Ghostscript) search {pop pop pop revision 927 gt}% + {pop false} ifelse% + {% + /BorderArrayPatch{} def% + }% + {% + /BorderArrayPatch{% + [exch{% + dup dup type/integertype eq exch type/realtype eq or% + {BPToDvips}if% + }forall]% + }def% + } ifelse % \end{macrocode} % The rectangle around the links starts off % \emph{exactly} the size of the box; @@ -19788,7 +19827,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.ins index 5779e77110a..e313a869b79 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/hyperref.ins @@ -3,10 +3,12 @@ %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through %% LaTeX or TeX. %% -%% Copyright 1995-1999 Sebastian Rahtz -%% 1999-2000 Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek -%% 2016 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project +%% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. %% ------------------------------------------- @@ -29,7 +31,7 @@ %% %% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ %% -\def\filedate{2010/01/25} +\def\filedate{2020/01/14} \def\batchfile{hyperref.ins} \input docstrip diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/nameref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/nameref.dtx index d8801b576b1..f6ea1c856a5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/nameref.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/nameref.dtx @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ %% 2000 Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019- The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/psdmapshortnames.pl b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/psdmapshortnames.pl deleted file mode 100755 index 9b2f280db8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/hyperref/psdmapshortnames.pl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ -#!/usr/bin/env perl -use strict; -$^W=1; - -# File: psdmapshortnames.pl -# Date: 2012-07-12 -# Copyright (c) 2012 by Heiko Oberdiek. -# -# This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. -# ------------------------------------------- -# -# This work may be distributed and/or modified under the -# conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -# of this license or (at your option) any later version. -# The latest version of this license is in -# http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -# and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -# version 2005/12/01 or later. -# -# This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -# -# The Current Maintainer of this work is The LaTeX3 Project. -# -# The list of all files belonging to the `Hyperref Bundle' is -# given in the file `manifest.txt'. - -my $file_org = 'hyperref.dtx'; -my $file_bak = 'hyperref.dtx.bak'; -my $file_tmp = 'hyperref.dtx.tmp'; - -my @lines_map; -my $cmd_map = 'psdmapshortnames'; -my $found_map_beg = 0; -my $found_map_end = 0; - -my @lines_alias; -my $cmd_alias = 'psdaliasnames'; -my $found_alias_beg = 0; -my $found_alias_end = 0; - -open(IN, '<', $file_org) or die "!!! Error: Cannot open `$file_org'!\n"; -binmode(IN); -unlink $file_tmp if -f $file_tmp; -open(OUT, '>', $file_tmp) or die "!!! Error: Cannot open `$file_org'!\n"; -binmode(OUT); - -while () { - print OUT; - if (/^\\newcommand\*\{\\$cmd_map\}\{\%\s*$/) { - $found_map_beg = 1; - print OUT @lines_map; - while () { - if (/^\}\% \\$cmd_map$/) { - print OUT; - $found_map_end = 1; - last; - } - if (/^\}/) { - print OUT; - last; - } - } - } - if (/^\\DeclareTextCommand\{\\text(\w+)\}\{PU\}\{[\\\d\w]+\}\%\*/) { - my $name = $1; - push @lines_map, " \\let\\$name\\text$name\n"; - } - - if (/^\\newcommand\*\{\\$cmd_alias\}\{\%\s*$/) { - $found_alias_beg = 1; - print OUT @lines_alias; - while () { - if (/^\}\% \\$cmd_alias$/) { - print OUT; - $found_alias_end = 1; - last; - } - if (/^\}/) { - print OUT; - last; - } - } - } - if (/^%\* \\([A-Za-z@]+)\s+->\s+\\(\w+)(\s|$)/) { - my $name_old = $1; - my $name_new = $2; - push @lines_alias, " \\let\\$name_new\\$name_old\n"; - } -} - -close(IN); -close(OUT); - -$found_map_beg or die "!!! Error: Definition for \\$cmd_map not found!\n"; -$found_map_end or die "!!! Error: End of \\$cmd_map not found!\n"; - -$found_alias_beg or die "!!! Error: Definition for \\$cmd_alias not found!\n"; -$found_alias_end or die "!!! Error: End of \\$cmd_alias not found!\n"; - -my $count_map = @lines_map; -print "* $count_map map entries found.\n"; - -my $count_alias = @lines_alias; -print "* $count_alias alias entries found.\n"; - -use Digest::MD5; - -open(IN, '<', $file_org) or die "!!! Error: Cannot open `$file_org'!\n"; -binmode(IN); -my $md5_org = Digest::MD5->new->addfile(*IN)->hexdigest; -close(IN); -print "* 0x$md5_org = md5($file_org)\n"; - -open(IN, '<', $file_tmp) or die "!!! Error: Cannot open `$file_tmp'!\n"; -binmode(IN); -my $md5_tmp = Digest::MD5->new->addfile(*IN)->hexdigest; -close(IN); -print "* 0x$md5_tmp = md5($file_tmp)\n"; - -if ($md5_org eq $md5_tmp) { - print "* Done, nothing to do.\n"; - exit(0); -} - -unlink $file_bak if -f $file_bak; -rename $file_org, $file_bak or die "!!! Error: Moving `$file_org' to `$file_bak' failed!\n"; -print "* $file_org -> $file_bak\n"; -rename $file_tmp, $file_org or die "!!! Error: Moving `$file_tmp' to `$file_org' failed!\n"; -print "* $file_tmp -> $file_org\n"; - -print "* Done.\n"; - -__END__ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/backref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/backref.sty index bb04d32f9c2..173e702de61 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/backref.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/backref.sty @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ %% Copyright (C) 1995-2000 David Carlisle, Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019- The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{backref} - [2016/05/21 v1.39 Bibliographical back referencing]% + [2020/01/14 v1.40 Bibliographical back referencing]% \RequirePackage{kvoptions}[2011/06/30] \RequirePackage{kvsetkeys}[2009/07/30] \RequirePackage{ltxcmds}[2009/12/12] diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipdfm.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipdfm.def index c6c5a697d90..f1af0069261 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipdfm.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipdfm.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `dvipdfm,pdfform,outlines') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hdvipdfm.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for dvipdfm] \Hy@VersionCheck{hdvipdfm.def} \def\Hy@PutCatalog#1{\@pdfm@mark{docview <<#1>>}} @@ -1085,7 +1086,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def index 1133389e169..da9d4e3b5e9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `dvips') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hdvips.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for dvips] \Hy@VersionCheck{hdvips.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{pdf} @@ -52,13 +53,20 @@ \headerps@out{% /DvipsToPDF{72.27 mul Resolution div} def% /PDFToDvips{72.27 div Resolution mul} def% - /BPToDvips{72 div Resolution mul}def% - /BorderArrayPatch{% - [exch{% - dup dup type/integertype eq exch type/realtype eq or% - {BPToDvips}if% - }forall]% - }def% + /BPToDvips{72 div Resolution mul}def + product (Ghostscript) search {pop pop pop revision 927 gt}% + {pop false} ifelse% + {% + /BorderArrayPatch{} def% + }% + {% + /BorderArrayPatch{% + [exch{% + dup dup type/integertype eq exch type/realtype eq or% + {BPToDvips}if% + }forall]% + }def% + } ifelse /HyperBorder {1 PDFToDvips} def% /H.V {pdf@hoff pdf@voff null} def% /H.B {/Rect[pdf@llx pdf@lly pdf@urx pdf@ury]} def% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipson.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipson.def index 0b63fb0e726..1148c23168d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipson.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvipson.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `dvipsone') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hdvipson.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for dvipsone] \Hy@VersionCheck{hdvipson.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{pdf} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdviwind.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdviwind.def index d5d7405f410..533f86f8bb1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdviwind.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hdviwind.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `dviwindo,pdfmarkbase') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hdviwind.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for dviwindo] \Hy@VersionCheck{hdviwind.def} \begingroup diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hluatex.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hluatex.def index 779b272d6c3..86bc1ee3a85 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hluatex.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hluatex.def @@ -7,11 +7,12 @@ %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `luatex') %% hluatex.dtx (with options: `luatex') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hluatex.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for luaTeX] \Hy@VersionCheck{hluatex.def} %% Source File: hluatex.dtx @@ -158,13 +159,15 @@ } \edef\Hy@pdfminorversion{\pdfvariable minorversion}% - \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion<5 % +\edef\Hy@pdfmajorversion{\pdfvariable majorversion}% + +\ifHy@ocgcolorlinks + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version<105 % \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.5}% \fi \fi \ifHy@setpdfversion - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@IfUndefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \ifHy@verbose @@ -172,13 +175,13 @@ PDF object streams are disabled, because they are% \MessageBreak not supported in requested PDF version % - 1.\Hy@pdfversion + \Hy@pdf@majorversion.\Hy@pdf@minorversion }% \fi \pdfobjcompresslevel=\ltx@zero }% \fi - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version=\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version\relax \else \let\Hy@temp\ltx@empty \def\Hy@temp@A#1#2{% @@ -201,10 +204,11 @@ \Hy@temp@A\pdflastlink{link}% }% \ifx\Hy@temp\ltx@empty - \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion\relax + \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax \else \let\Hy@temp@A\ltx@empty - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion=4 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version=104 % \IfFileExists{pdf14.sty}{% \def\Hy@temp@A{% \MessageBreak @@ -222,9 +226,10 @@ The version should be set as early as possible:% \MessageBreak \space\space - \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion, % + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion \string\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@ifundefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \MessageBreak @@ -237,11 +242,13 @@ \fi \fi \PackageInfo{hyperref}{% + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion.% \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion - :=\number\Hy@pdfversion\space + :=\number\Hy@pdf@majorversion.\number\Hy@pdf@minorversion\space }% \fi - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@majorversion{\number\Hy@pdfmajorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@minorversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks @@ -1367,7 +1374,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def index b0e65c9de04..a77a540e481 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `pdftex,pdfform,outlines') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hpdftex.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for pdfTeX] \Hy@VersionCheck{hpdftex.def} \pdf@ifdraftmode{% @@ -132,12 +133,12 @@ }% }{% \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version<105 % \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.5}% \fi \fi \ifHy@setpdfversion - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@IfUndefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \ifHy@verbose @@ -145,13 +146,13 @@ PDF object streams are disabled, because they are% \MessageBreak not supported in requested PDF version % - 1.\Hy@pdfversion + \Hy@pdf@majorversion.\Hy@pdf@minorversion }% \fi \pdfobjcompresslevel=\ltx@zero }% \fi - \ifnum\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \ifnum\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version=\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version\relax \else \let\Hy@temp\ltx@empty \def\Hy@temp@A#1#2{% @@ -174,10 +175,11 @@ \Hy@temp@A\pdflastlink{link}% }% \ifx\Hy@temp\ltx@empty - \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion\relax + \Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion\relax + \Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax \else \let\Hy@temp@A\ltx@empty - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion=4 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version=104 % \IfFileExists{pdf14.sty}{% \def\Hy@temp@A{% \MessageBreak @@ -195,9 +197,10 @@ The version should be set as early as possible:% \MessageBreak \space\space - \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdfversion + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion=\Hy@pdf@majorversion, % + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion=\Hy@pdf@minorversion \string\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % \ltx@ifundefined{pdfobjcompresslevel}{% }{% \MessageBreak @@ -210,11 +213,13 @@ \fi \fi \PackageInfo{hyperref}{% + \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfmajorversion.% \expandafter\string\Hy@pdfminorversion - :=\number\Hy@pdfversion\space + :=\number\Hy@pdf@majorversion.\number\Hy@pdf@minorversion\space }% \fi - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@majorversion{\number\Hy@pdfmajorversion}% + \edef\Hy@pdf@minorversion{\number\Hy@pdfminorversion}% } \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% \ifHy@ocgcolorlinks @@ -1342,7 +1347,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.cfg index 2833366cb13..58381fe55cf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.cfg +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.cfg @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `tex4htcfg') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{htex4ht.cfg} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref configuration file for TeX4ht] \IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}{\endinput}{} \Preamble{html} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.def index cde102a386d..8076b8c5c66 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htex4ht.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `tex4ht') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{htex4ht.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for TeX4ht] \Hy@VersionCheck{htex4ht.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{html} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htexture.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htexture.def index 5be02c982f5..f3f5a245870 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htexture.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/htexture.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `textures') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{htexture.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for Textures] \Hy@VersionCheck{htexture.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{pdf} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtex.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtex.def index 5bafab7335d..11e8adf1b55 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtex.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtex.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `vtex,outlines') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hvtex.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for VTeX in PDF/PS mode] \Hy@VersionCheck{hvtex.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{pdf} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexhtm.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexhtm.def index 1a095359968..14e148135be 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexhtm.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexhtm.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `vtexhtml') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hvtexhtml.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for VTeX in HTML mode] \Hy@VersionCheck{hvtexhtm.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{htm} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexmrk.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexmrk.def index 72247b07134..89a716d95db 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexmrk.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hvtexmrk.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `vtexpdfmark') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hvtexmrk.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for VTeX in PDF/PS mode (pdfmark specials)] \Hy@VersionCheck{hvtexmrk.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{pdf} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hxetex.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hxetex.def index d2ebff02ce0..65402ed7892 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hxetex.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hxetex.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `xetex,pdfform,outlines') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hxetex.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for XeTeX] \Hy@VersionCheck{hxetex.def} \HyPsd@LoadUnicode @@ -1152,7 +1153,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hylatex.ltx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hylatex.ltx deleted file mode 100644 index 7eb223db30d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hylatex.ltx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -% -% hylatex.ltx -% Tanmoy Bhattacharya and Sebastian Rahtz, June 1995 -% -% Use this file to make a format which includes the -% hyperref package in every LaTeX job. -% -% In web2c 7-based TeX world, we create the format file with -% tex -ini \&latex hylatex.ltx -% and then use with -% tex \&hylatex -% -% In teTeX (TeX version 3.14159 (C version 6.1), LaTeX2e <1996/12/01> -% patch level 1), I create the format file with -% initex \&latex hylatex.ltx -% and then use with -% virtex \&hylatex -% -% This method is not supported by the LaTeX2e team, so -% I will try to find a better way. \AtBeginDocument does not -% work for reasons which I do not understand. -% -\makeatletter -\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{\the\everyjob - \typeout{ ********* Hyperref Macros loaded ******* }} -% -\expandafter\let\csname REAL document\endcsname\document -% -\def\document{% - \endgroup -% -% NOTE: -% This setup sets up no options by default; -% change to suit your needs, by writing a hyperref.cfg control -% file. -% - \RequirePackage{hyperref} - \begingroup - \@endpefalse\csname REAL document\endcsname -} -\makeatother -\dump - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty index a4ba009794f..333436f3fe9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `package') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ %% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] \ProvidesPackage{hyperref} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hypertext links for LaTeX] \begingroup \@makeother\`% @@ -2894,22 +2895,33 @@ \@ifundefined{Hy@pdfversion@#1}{% \PackageWarning{hyperref}{% Unsupported PDF version `#1'.\MessageBreak - Valid values: 1.2 until 1.9% + Valid values: 1.2-1.7, 2.0% }% }{% \Hy@setpdfversiontrue - \edef\Hy@pdfversion{\@nameuse{Hy@pdfversion@#1}}% - }% -} -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.2}{2}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.3}{3}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.4}{4}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.5}{5}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.6}{6}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.7}{7}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.8}{8}% -\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.9}{9}% -\def\Hy@pdfversion{5} + \@nameuse{Hy@pdfversion@#1}% + }% +} +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.2}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{2}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.3}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{3}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.4}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{4}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.5}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{5}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.6}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{6}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.7}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{7}}% +\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@2.0}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{2}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{0}}% +\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{5} +\let\Hy@pdfversion\Hy@pdf@minorversion +\def\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version{\numexpr100*\Hy@pdf@majorversion+\Hy@pdf@minorversion\relax} +\def\Hy@pdfmajorminor@version{\numexpr100*\Hy@pdfmajorversion+\Hy@pdfminorversion\relax} +\@ifundefined{pdfminorversion}{}{% +\@ifundefined{pdfmajorversion}{% +\newcount\pdfmajorversion +\pdfmajorversion=1 +}{}% +} +\ifx\pdfmajorversion\@undefined\else +\def\Hy@pdfmajorversion{\pdfmajorversion} +\fi \newif\ifHy@DviMode \let\Hy@DviErrMsg\ltx@empty \ifpdf @@ -4452,7 +4464,7 @@ } \Hy@DisableOption{pdfa} \ifHy@pdfa - \ifnum \Hy@pdfversion < 4 + \ifnum \Hy@pdf@majorminor@version< 104 \kvsetkeys{Hyp}{pdfversion=1.4}% \fi \Hy@DisableOption{pdfversion}% @@ -4666,7 +4678,7 @@ \ifx\HyOpt@CustomDriver\ltx@empty \ifx\Hy@driver\@empty \def\HyOpt@DriverType{ (autodetected)}% - \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}% + \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}% \ifpdf \ifx\pdfextension\@undefined \def\Hy@driver{hpdftex}% @@ -5872,7 +5884,7 @@ \kv@parse{#1}{% \Hy@pdfstringdef\kv@key\kv@key \ifx\kv@value\relax - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<3 % implementation note 122, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<103 % implementation note 122, PDF spec 1.7 \xdef\Fld@choices{\Fld@choices[(\kv@key)(\kv@key)]}% \else \xdef\Fld@choices{\Fld@choices(\kv@key)}% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hypertex.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hypertex.def index a6941dd4f43..1d63bdad66c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hypertex.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hypertex.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `hypertex') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{hypertex.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref driver for HyperTeX specials] \Hy@VersionCheck{hypertex.def} \providecommand*{\XR@ext}{dvi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/minitoc-hyper.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/minitoc-hyper.sty index 2106de9dba3..4e2e66fa05a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/minitoc-hyper.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/minitoc-hyper.sty @@ -1,2304 +1,7 @@ -\def\fileversion{v28href} -\def\filedate{1999/05/17} -% minitoc-hyper.sty -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Jean-Pierre Drucbert -% ONERA/CERT/GPI -% Office National d'\'Etudes et de Recherches A\'erospatiales -% Centre d'\'Etudes et de Recherches de Toulouse -% Groupe de Prestations Informatiques -% Complexe Scientifique de Rangueil -% 2, Avenue \'Edouard Belin -% BP 4025 -% F-31055 TOULOUSE CEDEX -% FRANCE -% -% Phone +33-62-25-25-15 -% -% Email: drucbert@onecert.fr -% -% Please send me any (constructive) suggestions and comments. -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Temporarily patched by Bernd Jaehne [Bernd.Jaehne@aeon.de] -% and Didier Verna [verna@inf.enst.fr] to -% work with hyperref.sty from s.rahtz@elsevier.co.uk -% using input from Tony Roberts [aroberts@usq.edu.au] -% For changes see comments %%BJ and %DV -% -% However: this patch works only when hyperref.sty is used, -% otherwise errors occur. Thus it may be advisable to add code -% so that minitoc runs both in standard and hyperref mode. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% History (contains some obsolete things... it is NOT -% the REAL documentation) -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% minitoc.sty --- redefines the \chapter command to display a -% mini-table-of-contents at the beginning of every chapter. -% Oct-90 Original version, by Nigel Ward. -% Nov-91 Revised to reuse \chapter, \section, \subsection commands -% transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically, -% assorted other cleanup. Dan Jurafsky -% Jun/Jul-93 New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite -% for each chapter (!) -% Added \chapterend to terminate the scope of a minitoc. -% (IF YOU FORGOT PUTTING \chapterend at the end -% of EACH chapter, an entry for the next chapter -% will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to Yufan Hu). -% Replaced ``minipage'' environnement by a ``verse'' -% environnement, to allow a minitoc split across pages. -% All the layout of the minitoc is in the -% \minitableofcontents command, so if someboby wants -% to redefine that layout, he has just to -% rewrite it (and only it). -% -% You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter -% by preceding it with \minitocno. (\minitocyes -% is useless for the user: it is implicit AFTER -% the \chapter* pseudo-chapters). -% -% Problems: you MUST have \chapterend to terminate each -% chapter with a minitoc. -% How about avoiding this constraint? -% -% The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with -% the counter `minitocdepth' (as `tocdepth' for the table -% of contents). -% At least three passes (3!!!) of LaTeX are necessary to get -% correct minitoc's (the first pass creates the .mtcX files, -% the second uses them (but they may contain wrong page -% numbers) and recreates them, the third should be ok). -% -% Works with \chapter[xxx]{yyy} and floating bodies. -% Works with two columns (but the minitoc is in composed in -% one column; how to make it to spread over the two column?) -% Some mods added to work with xr.sty (external references). -% xr.sty version 5 is much more tolerant. -% 05Jul93 Version 2 -% Added compatibility with hangcaption.sty (the option -% hangcaption (if present) must be given BEFORE minitoc -% option.) -% BEWARE to options modifying \@caption -% Version 3 not released (buggy) -% 09Jul93 Version 4 -% Added \if@realch to avoid contentslines from -% pseudo-chapters to go into the toc! -% The option file mtcoff.sty allows to use a latex -% document with minitoc commands and to make them -% transparent: just replace the minitoc option by -% mtcoff. -% 13Jul93 Version 5 -% Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things -% in the minitoc's. -% 15Jul93 Version 6 -% Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, -% removed obsolete \caption stuff (filters are better) -% added compatibility with toch.sty -% (toch.sty makes a table of chapters. If used, -% must be loaded BEFORE minitoc.sty) -% 22Jul93 Version 7 (MAJOR DIFFERENCES) -% Completely rewritten, using tricks from xr.sty -% (the version 5, by David Carlisle). The info -% for minitocs is directly stolen from the .toc -% file. -% \chapterend and \minitocno are suppressed -% \minitoc, \dominitoc and \faketableofcontents added -% 29Jul93 Version 8 -% Spacing adjustements. -% 04Aug93 Version 9 -% Added mods for MS-DOS (search MS-DOS, uncomment; -% search UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows only -% 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!). -% 05Aug93 Version 10 -% Works with appendices. -% Detects obsolete versions of latex.tex. -% (\@inputcheck or \reset@font not defined). -% 18Aug93 Version 11 -% Added \mtcSfont, font for section entries, -% \mtcSSfont for subsection entries, -% \mtcSSSfont for subsubsection entries, -% \mtcPfont for paragraph entries, -% \mtcSPfont for subparagraph entries. -% -% 16Dec93 Version 12 -% Use \kern's in place of \vspace*'s, -% and added penalties (\nopagebreak) to -% avoid a page break just before last \mtc@rule. -% Also added a \samepage environnement. -% Removed old commented out lines from -% previous versions. -% -% 17Dec93 Version 13 -% Added minilof and minilot stuff. -% For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \SHORTEXT. -% -% 03Jan94 Version 14 -% Corrected space under minitoc/lof/lot and added a -% \raggedright to avoid ``underfull'' warnings. -% Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding ~'s). -% \mtifont changed from \normalsize\bf to -% \large\bf. -% Some mods suggested by Donald Arseneau (thanks): -% \@newread becomes \newread, not outer -% version of \newread. -% \empty replaced by \relax in the spare definition -% of \reset@font. -% Removed \clubpenalty=10000 and \widowpenalty=10000 -% (done by \samepage), and \noindent. -% Simplified processing of optional argument in -% \minitoc, \minilof and \minilot. -% -% 27Jan94 Version 15 -% Added parttoc, partlof and partlot for books, -% with commands and parameters parallel to -% those for mini-things. -% -% Added secttoc, sectlof and sectlot for articles, -% with commands and parameters parallel to -% those for mini-things. -% -% 02Feb94 Version 16 -% Bug fixes (typos). -% -% 23Jun94 Version 17 -% Keyword 'n' (null) synonym of 'e' (empty). -% Compatibility with LaTeX ``2e''. -% Thanks to Denis Roegel (who found -% the problem) and Frank Mittelbach -% (who gave the hints to solve). -% -% 26Jun94 Version 18 -% Make minitoc really compatible with latex2e -% Introduce the language files as options -% Thanks to Michel Goossens (via Frank Mittelbach) -% who was inspired by the code of babel (Johannes Braams). -% -% 16Aug94 Version 19 -% Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, -% sections) not starting at 1. -% \firstchapteris etc. commands added. -% \mtcrule, \nomtcrule etc. commands added. -% Corrected a bug in \c@mti. -% Corrected mtcswedish.sty (Jan Michel Rynning) -% Corrected appendix in articles -% -% 25Aug94 Version 20 -% Corrected spacing before and after minitocs -% and siblings. -% Added \mtcpagenumbers and \nomtcpagenumbers -% (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without -% page numbers. Default: page numbers. -% Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles. -% Corrected vertical spacing. -% Corrected a problem with chapters numbered -% with (uppercase) roman numbers. -% -% 07Sep94 Version 21 -% Corrected typos in minitoc.sty and minitoc.tex. -% -% 10Oct94 Version 22 -% Corrected typos in minitoc.sty. -% -% 08Nov94 Version 23 -% Added a missing line in \sectlof@. -% Works with document classes resetting -% chapter (or section) number at each part. -% (Thanks to Denis Roegel) -% Removed stuff for \firstchapteris and co. -% These commands are obsolete. -% Removed appendix stuff. -% -% 21Dec94 Version 24 -% The \protect commands have been removed from -% the .toc, .lot and .lot files, so some internal -% macros have been corrected to be compatible -% with the LaTeX2e release of December 1994. -% Thanks to Denis Roegel who did the work. -% -% 13Sep96 Version 25 -% Updated mtcnorsk.sty and added mtcnynorsk.sty -% on a suggestion from Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no). -% -% 14Nov96 Version 26 -% Language specific commands are now names .mld -% (in place of mtc.sty) because there are not -% packages and it makes shorter names. -% Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, -% russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; -% renamed esperanto into esperant like in Babel. -% -% 20Dec96 Version 27 -% Corrections for starred sectionning commands. -% english.mld loaded as default language. -% Added vietnam.mld. -% Added arab.mld. -% Renamed minitocoff.sty into mtcoff.sty to -% keep the name short. -% -% -% Jean-Pierre Drucbert -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]% -%%% This file will not work with latex2.09 -\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space - The minitoc package] -\typeout{*** minitoc package, version 27p ***}% -\@ifundefined{part}% -{}% -{\typeout{*** part level macros available ***} -\let\mtc@svpart\part %23 -\def\part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart}} %23 -\@ifundefined{chapter}% -{% -\@ifundefined{section}% -{\typeout{*** no section or chapter level macros available ***}% -\typeout{*** PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS ***}}% -{\typeout{*** section level macros available ***} -\let\mtc@svsection\section %23 -\def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection} %23 -\let\mtc@svss\@ssect %23 -%v25 \def\@ssect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}\mtc@svss} %23 -}% -}% -{\typeout{*** chapter level macros available ***} -\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter %23 -\def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter} %23 -} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% ***** **** *** ***** -% * * * * * -% *** * * * * -% * * * * * -% ***** **** *** * -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%\def\SHORTEXT{SHORTEXT} %%% UNCOMMENT FOR DOS AND - %%% SYSTEMS WITH SHORT EXTENSIONS - %%% TO FILE NAMES - %%% LEAVE IT COMMENTED OUT - %%% FOR UNIX AND O.S. WITH - %%% LONG EXTENSIONS - %%% YOU CAN VERIFY BY LATEXING - %%% AN EXAMPLE DOCUMENT - %%% ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEARS - %%% PLEASE CORRECT IF THE MESSAGE IS WRONG -% v27 : claim the type of system! -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{==> this version is configured for UNIX-like (long extensions) file names.}}% -{\typeout{==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like (8+3) file names.}} -% -%not outer version of \newread -\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n} -\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}% - {\typeout{Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.}% - \typeout{Trying to continue...}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{} -\@ifundefined{reset@font}% - {\typeout{Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.}% - \typeout{Trying to continue...}\let\reset@font\relax}{} -\newwrite\tf@mtc % a file descriptor to write minitocs -\newtoks\mtc@toks -\def\mtc@string{\relax} -\newbox\mtc@strutbox -\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height2.5ex - depth1.8ex width\z@} -\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox\else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi} -\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode% - \mtc@strut\vphantom{Lp$^{l^l}_{p_p}$}} % a pseudo-strut ? -% \@BBR discourages page breaks -\def\@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]} -% Modified version to ignore the dots and the page number. % 17b -\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else % 17b - \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@ % 17b - {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip % 17b - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue % 17b - \interlinepenalty\@M % 17b - \leavevmode % 17b - \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}% % 17b - \hskip -\leftskip % 17b - #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak % 17b - \null\par}\fi} % 17b -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%17b -\def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null} %17b -\mtcpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null} %17b -\stcpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null} %17b -\ptcpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax} %17b -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%17b -\def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null} %17b -\mlfpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null} %17b -\slfpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null} %17b -\plfpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax} %17b -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%17b -\def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null} %17b -\mltpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null} %17b -\sltpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax} %17b -\def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null} %17b -\pltpagenumbers %default %17b -\def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax} %17b -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%17b -% if you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs, -% you need to create the .toc file, without inputing it -% into your document. This command is a stripped off version -% of \tableofcontents -\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}} -% idem for list of figures -\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}} -% idem for list of tables -\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}} -\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup - \makeatletter - \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname - \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax - \fi \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup} -%% -\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth -\global\let\@mkboth\markboth -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% -\def\The@chapter{\arabic{mtc}} %23 -\def\firstchapteris#1% - {\typeout{^^JWARNING*** \string\firstchapteris}% - \typeout{ is an obsolete command^^J}} -\newcounter{mtc} % counter of minitocs -\setcounter{mtc}{0} -\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\newcounter{minitocdepth} % analog to tocdepth, but for minitocs -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2} % default value -\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@} % the \hrule is .4pt high - -\newlength\mtcindent % indentation (left/right) of minitocs -\mtcindent=24pt % defaut value -\def\mtcfont{\small\rm} % font for the minitoc -\def\mtcSfont{\small\bf} % font for the minitoc (sections) -\def\mtcSSfont{\mtcfont} % font for the minitoc (subsections) -\def\mtcSSSfont{\mtcfont} % font for the minitoc (subsubsections) -\def\mtcPfont{\mtcfont} % font for the minitoc (paragraphs) -\def\mtcSPfont{\mtcfont} % font for the minitoc (subparagraphs) -\def\mlffont{\mtcfont} % font for the minilof (figures) -\def\mltfont{\mtcfont} % font for the minilot (tables) -\def\mtifont{\large\bf} % font for titles - -% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. -\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} -\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} -\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} -\def\e@mti#1{\relax} -\def\n@mti#1{\relax} - -% Default: titles on left -\let\do@mtitc\l@mti -\let\df@mtitc\l@mti -\let\do@mtilf\l@mti -\let\df@mtilf\l@mti -\let\do@mtilt\l@mti -\let\df@mtilt\l@mti - -%v27 Language dependent names: default values. Now -%v27 english.mld is loaded first. -%v27 \@ifundefined{mtctitle}{\def\mtctitle{Contents}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{mlftitle}{\def\mlftitle{Figures}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{mlttitle}{\def\mlttitle{Tables}}{\relax} - -\def\mtc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{\itemsep\z@\itemindent \z@\listparindent \itemindent - \leftmargin\mtcindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]} -\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} - -% this command must be used after \chapter -% if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc) -\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}} - -\def\minitoc@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\mtcfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent %% - \ifx\mtc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\mtcindent - \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{mtc@verse}\c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{mtc\The@chapter}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{M\The@chapter}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the minitoc - -% Added in version #13 -% this command must be used after \chapter -% if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof) -\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}} - -\def\minilof@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\mlffont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\mtc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\mtcindent - \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for minilof - \begin{mtc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}% - {\let@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{mlf\The@chapter}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{F\The@chapter}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the minilof - -% Added in version #13 -% this command must be used after \chapter -% if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot) -\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}} - -\def\minilot@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\mltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\mtc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\mtcindent - \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for minilot - \begin{mtc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{mlt\The@chapter}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{T\The@chapter}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the minilot - -% I use a depth of 10000 to inhibit the printing of -% that contentsline. -\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} -\def\xchapter{xchapter} - -\let\sv@chapter\@chapter -\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax% -\addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}% -\addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}% -} - -% tricky code to deal with \chapter* -\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter -\def\@schapter{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter% -} -\def\@schapter{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter% -} -\let\chapterend\relax -\let\chapterbegin\relax - -\let\appendixmtc\relax - -% this command extracts info from the .toc file -% and create the .mtcN files (.mtc -> .M on MS-DOS) -\def\@dominitoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} % START VALUE - \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} %23: raz -% this command extracts info from the .lof file -% and create the .mlfN files (.mlf -> .F on MS-DOS) -\def\@dominilof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} % START VALUE - \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} %23: raz -% this command extracts info from the .lot file -% and create the .mltN files (.mlt -> .T on MS-DOS) -\def\@dominilot#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} % START VALUE - \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} %23: raz - -\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}} -\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}} -\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}} - -\def\dominitoc@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominitoc} - -\def\dominilof@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominilof} - -\def\dominilot@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominilot} - -\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} - -\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MTC@list{#2}% - \MTC@loop{#1}} -\def\MTC@toc{% - \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi} - -%%%%%%% patch minitoc to write *.mtc files with link name at end -% so that hyperref contentsline works properly---I hope -\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%BJ: 4 instead of 3 parameters -\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax - \stepcounter{mtc}% % the mtc counter simulates the chapter counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc}% % UNIX -\def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc}% % MS-DOS -\def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .mtcN .mtc->.M on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname % open next .mtcN (.mtc->.M if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcPfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSPfont - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -% Added v25: \starchapter and co. -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter\relax -\stepcounter{mtc}% % the mtc counter simulates the chapter counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc}% % UNIX -\def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc}% % MS-DOS -\def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .mtcN .mtc->.M on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname % open next .mtcN (.mtc->.M if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcPfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mtcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mtcSPfont - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%BJ: #4 is hyperlink - \fi -} - - -\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\} -\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JMINITOCS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\MTC@toc - \else - \typeout{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MTC@read\fi} -\def\MTC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line - \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line....\MTC@% - }% -% now patch MTC@test % %%BJ: call \MTC@contentsline with 4 instead of 3 parameters -\newcommand{\scrubdots}[5]{#1} %%BJ: added by Tony Roberts -\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5\MTC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{\scrubdots#5}% %%BJ: 4. parameter added by Tony Roberts - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend % \chapter* closes .mtcN (.mtc->.M on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% % \chapter* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MTC@toc - \else\expandafter\MTC@read\fi}% -%%%%%%%%%% end of minitoc patches - - -\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MLF@list{#2}% - \MLF@loop{#1}} -\def\MLF@lof{% - \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi} - -\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3{% -\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter\relax - \stepcounter{mtc}% % the mtc counter simulates the chapter counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc}% % UNIX -\def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc}% % MS-DOS -\def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .mlfN .mlf->.F on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname % open next .mlfN (.mlf->.F if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mlffont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mlffont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\} -\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JMINILOFS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\MLF@lof - \else - \typeout{PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MLF@read\fi} -\def\MLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line - \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line....\MLF@% - }% -\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5\MLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend % \chapter* closes .mlfN (.mlf->.F on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% % \chapter* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof - \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}% - -\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MLT@list{#2}% - \MLT@loop{#1}} -\def\MLT@lot{% - \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi} - -\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3{% -\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter\relax - \stepcounter{mtc}% % the mtc counter simulates the chapter counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc}% % UNIX -\def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc}% % MS-DOS -\def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .mltN .mlt->.T on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname % open next .mltN (.mlt->.T if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\mltfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\mltfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\} -\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JMINILOTS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\MLT@lot - \else - \typeout{PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MLT@read\fi} -\def\MLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line - \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line....\MLT@% - }% -\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5\MLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend % \chapter* closes .mltN (.mlt->.T on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% % \chapter* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot - \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}% -} % end of chapter level - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -% If \part is defined (book or article-like document), -% the following macros are allowed -% Sometimes, we need to make a difference between book and -% article (is \chapter defined?), to have a different layout. -\@ifundefined{part}{}% -{% -\def\xpart{xpart} -\def\Thepart{\arabic{part}} -\def\firstpartis#1% - {\typeout{^^JWARNING*** \string\firstpartis}% - \typeout{ is an obsolete command^^J}} -\newcounter{ptc} % counter of parttocs -\setcounter{ptc}{0} -\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}} -\newcounter{parttocdepth} % analog to tocdepth, but for parttocs -\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2} - -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% -\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}% the \hrule is .4pt high -}{\let\ptc@rule\relax} % no rule before/after parttoc/partlof/partlot - % for books - -\newlength\ptcindent % indentation (left/right) of parttocs -\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24pt}{\ptcindent=0pt} % defaut value - -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% -\def\ptcfont{\small\rm} % font for the parttoc -\def\ptcSfont{\small\bf} % font for the parttoc (sections) -\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subsections) -\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subsubsections) -\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (paragraphs) -\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subparagraphs) -\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % font for the partlof (figures) -\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % font for the partlot (tables) -\def\ptifont{\large\bf} % font for titles -}{% -\def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rm} % font for the parttoc -\def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\bf} % font for the parttoc (chapters) -\def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rm} % font for the parttoc (sections) -\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subsections) -\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subsubsections) -\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (paragraphs) -\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % font for the parttoc (subparagraphs) -\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % font for the partlof (figures) -\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % font for the partlot (tables) -\def\ptifont{\Huge\bf} % font for titles -} - -% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% -\def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} -\def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} -\def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} -\def\e@pti#1{\relax} -\def\n@pti#1{\relax} -}{% -\def\e@pti#1{\relax} -\def\n@pti#1{\relax} -\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]% - \else - \@makephead@l{#1}% - \@afterheading - \fi} -\def\@makephead@l#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright - \ptifont - #1\par - \nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }} -\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}]% - \else - \@makephead@r{#1}% - \@afterheading - \fi} -\def\@makephead@r#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft - \ptifont - #1\par - \nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }} -\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]% - \else - \@makephead@c{#1}% - \@afterheading - \fi} -\def\@makephead@c#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \centering - \ptifont - #1\par - \nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }}% -} - -% Default: titles on left -\let\do@ptitc\l@pti -\let\df@ptitc\l@pti -\let\do@ptilf\l@pti -\let\df@ptilf\l@pti -\let\do@ptilt\l@pti -\let\df@ptilt\l@pti - -%v27 % Language dependent names: default values -%v27 \@ifundefined{chapter}{% -%v27 \@ifundefined{ptctitle}{\def\ptctitle{Contents}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{plftitle}{\def\plftitle{Figures}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{plttitle}{\def\plttitle{Tables}}{\relax}}% -%v27 {% -%v27 \@ifundefined{ptctitle}{\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{plftitle}{\def\plftitle{List of Figures}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{plttitle}{\def\plttitle{List of Tables}}{\relax} -%v27 } - -\def\ptc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{\itemsep\z@\itemindent \z@\listparindent \itemindent - \leftmargin\ptcindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]} -\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} - -% this command must be used after \part -% if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc) -\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}} - -\def\parttoc@[#1]{% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\cleardoublepage - \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth - \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispagestyle{empty} - \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\ptctitle}}{\uppercase{\ptctitle}}% - }% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\ptcfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \nopagebreak[4]% - \ifx\ptc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\ptcindent - \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{ptc@verse}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - {\cleardoublepage}} - -% this command must be used after \part -% if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof) -\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}} - -\def\partlof@[#1]{% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\cleardoublepage - \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth - \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispagestyle{empty} - \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\plftitle}}{\uppercase{\plftitle}}% - }% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\plffont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\ptc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}}\\ - \@ifundefined{chapter}{\hline}{} - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\ptcindent - \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for partlof - \begin{ptc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - {\cleardoublepage}} - -% Added in version #13 -% this command must be used after \part -% if you need a minilot (no automatic partlot) -\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}} - -\def\partlot@[#1]{% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\cleardoublepage - \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth - \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispagestyle{empty} - \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\plttitle}}{\uppercase{\plttitle}}% - }% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\pltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\ptc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}}\\ - \@ifundefined{chapter}{\hline}{} - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\ptcindent - \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for partlot - \begin{ptc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - {\cleardoublepage}} - -% I use a depth of 10000 to inhibit the printing of -% that contentsline. -\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} - -\def\pchapter{pchapter} - -\let\sv@part\@part -\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax% -\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}% -\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}% -} - -% tricky code to deal with \part* -\let\ptc@spart\@spart -\def\@spart{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart% -} -\def\@spart{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart% -} -\let\partend\relax -\let\partbegin\relax - -\let\appendixmtc\relax - -% this command extracts info from the .toc file -% and create the .ptcN files (.ptc -> .P on MS-DOS) -\def\@doparttoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{ptc}{0} % START VALUE - \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}} %23; raz -% this command extracts info from the .lof file -% and create the .plfN files (.plf -> .G on MS-DOS) -\def\@dopartlof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{ptc}{0} % START VALUE - \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}} %23: raz -% this command extracts info from the .lot file -% and create the .pltN files (.plt -> .U on MS-DOS) -\def\@dopartlot#1{{% - \setcounter{ptc}{0} % START VALUE - \makeatletter - \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}} %23: raz - -\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}} -\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}} -\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}} - -\def\doparttoc@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@doparttoc} - -\def\dopartlof@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dopartlof} - -\def\dopartlot@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dopartlot} - -\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} - -\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PTC@list{#2}% - \PTC@loop{#1}} -\def\PTC@toc{% - \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi} - -\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax - \stepcounter{ptc}% % the ptc counter simulates the part counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}% % UNIX -\def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}% % MS-DOS -\def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .ptcN .ptc->.P on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname % open next .ptcN (.ptc->.P if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcCfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcCfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcPfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSPfont - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -% Added v25: \starchapter & co. -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcCfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcCfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSSSfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcPfont% - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\ptcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\ptcSPfont - \space #3}{#4}}}}\@tempa% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters - \fi -} - -\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\} -\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JPARTTOCS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\PTC@toc - \else - \typeout{PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PTC@read\fi} -\def\PTC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line - \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line....\PTC@% - }% -\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5\PTC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{\scrubdots#5}% %%DV: 4 instead of 3 params - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend % \part* closes .ptcN (.ptc->.P on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% % \part* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc - \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}% - -\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PLF@list{#2}% - \PLF@loop{#1}} -\def\PLF@lof{% - \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi} - -\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3{% -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart\relax - \stepcounter{ptc}% % the ptc counter simulates the part counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}% % UNIX -\def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}% % MS-DOS -\def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .plfN .plf->.G on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname % open next .plfN (.plf->.G if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\plffont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\plffont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\} -\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JPARTLOFS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\PLF@lof - \else - \typeout{PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PLF@read\fi} -\def\PLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line - \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line....\PLF@% - }% -\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5\PLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend % \part* closes .plfN (.plf->.G on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% % \part* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof - \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}% - -\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PLT@list{#2}% - \PLT@loop{#1}} -\def\PLT@lot{% - \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi} - -\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3{% -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart\relax - \stepcounter{ptc}% % the ptc counter simulates the part counter -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}% % UNIX -\def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}% % MS-DOS -\def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .pltN .plt->.U on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname % open next .pltN (.plt->.U if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\pltfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\pltfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\} -\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JPARTLOTS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\PLT@lot - \else - \typeout{PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PLT@read\fi} -\def\PLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line - \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line....\PLT@% - }% -\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5\PLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend % \part* closes .pltN (.plt->.U on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% % \part* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot - \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}% -} % end of part stuff - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% If \chapter is not defined but \section is, then -%%% the following macros are available (for article-like documents). -%%% Braces are inscrutable! -\@ifundefined{chapter}% -{\@ifundefined{section}{}{% -\def\firstsectionis#1% - {\typeout{^^JWARNING*** \string\firstsectionis}% - \typeout{ is an obsolete command^^J}} -\newcounter{stc} % counter of secttocs -\setcounter{stc}{0} -\newcounter{secttocdepth} % analog to tocdepth, but for secttocs -\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2} - -% rule before/after secttoc/sectlof/sectlot -\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@} % the \hrule is .4pt high - -\newlength\stcindent % indentation (left/right) of secttocs -\stcindent=24pt % defaut value -\def\stcfont{\small\rm} % font for the secttoc -\def\stcSSfont{\normalsize\bf} % font for the secttoc (subsections) -\def\stcSSSfont{\stcfont} % font for the secttoc (subsubsections) -\def\stcPfont{\stcfont} % font for the secttoc (paragraphs) -\def\stcSPfont{\stcfont} % font for the secttoc (subparagraphs) -\def\slffont{\stcfont} % font for the sectlof (figures) -\def\sltfont{\stcfont} % font for the sectlot (tables) -\def\stifont{\Large\bf} % font for titles - -% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. -\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} -\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} -\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} -\def\e@sti#1{\relax} -\def\n@sti#1{\relax} - -% Default: titles on left -\let\do@stitc\l@sti -\let\df@stitc\l@sti -\let\do@stilf\l@sti -\let\df@stilf\l@sti -\let\do@stilt\l@sti -\let\df@stilt\l@sti - -%v27 % Language dependent names: default values -%v27 \@ifundefined{stctitle}{\def\stctitle{Contents}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{slftitle}{\def\slftitle{Figures}}{\relax} -%v27 \@ifundefined{slttitle}{\def\slttitle{Tables}}{\relax} - -\def\stc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{\itemsep\z@\itemindent \z@\listparindent \itemindent - \leftmargin\stcindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]} -\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} - -% this command must be used after \section -% if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc) -\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}} - -\def\secttoc@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\stcfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\stc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\stcindent - \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{stc@verse}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} %23 -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{S\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the secttoc - -% this command must be used after \section -% if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof) -\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}} - -\def\sectlof@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\slffont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\stc@rule\relax % correction 07Nov94 v23 - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\stcindent - \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for sectlof - \begin{stc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} %23 -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{H\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the secttoc - -% Added in version #13 -% this command must be used after \section -% if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot) -\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}} - -\def\sectlot@[#1]{% - \relax\begin{samepage}% we begin a local group here, using samepage - \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \raggedright % added #14 - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\sltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\stc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}}\\ - \end{tabular}\else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - {\reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}}\\\hline - \end{tabular}\fi - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\vrule width \z@ - height \z@ depth \z@\\\@BBR% - \leftmargin\stcindent - \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - % depth does not matter for sectlot - \begin{stc@verse}%\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\@BBR% this blank line is necessary to avoid - % a wild negative indentation - \vskip -.5\baselineskip -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\def\@tocfile{V\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}\if@filesw - \fi% - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% - \kern0.\baselineskip% - \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip - \vrule width \z@ height \z@ - depth \z@\end{samepage}% %## the \\ is essential - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - % some space under the secttoc - -% I use a depth of 10000 to inhibit the printing of -% that contentsline. -\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} - -\def\xsect{xsect} -\def\schapter{schapter} - -\let\sv@sect\@sect -\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% -\ifnum #2=1 -\addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% -\addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% -\fi -\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} - -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{ -\expandafter -\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax % ADDED -\addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% ADDED -\addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% ADDED -\fi % ADDED -\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax % ADDED v25 -\addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% ADDED v25 -\addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% ADDED v25 -\fi % ADDED v25 -\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty\else - \refstepcounter{#1}\edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}\fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup #6\relax - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline - {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi - #7}\else - \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax %% \relax added 2 May 90 - \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname - {#7}\addcontentsline - {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi - #7}}\fi - \@xsect{#5}} - -% tricky code to deal with \section* -\let\stc@ssect\@ssect -\def\@ssect{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectend}\stc@ssect% -} -\def\@ssect{% -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin}\stc@ssect% -} -\let\sectend\relax -\let\sectbegin\relax - -\let\appendixmtc\relax - -% this command extracts info from the .toc file -% and create the .stcN files (.stc -> .S on MS-DOS) -\def\@dosecttoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{stc}{0} % START VALUE - \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} %23: raz -% this command extracts info from the .lof file -% and create the .slfN files (.slf -> .H on MS-DOS) -\def\@dosectlof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{stc}{0} % START VALUE - \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} %23: raz -% this command extracts info from the .lot file -% and create the .sltN files (.slt -> .V on MS-DOS) -\def\@dosectlot#1{{% - \setcounter{stc}{0} % START VALUE - \makeatletter - \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} %23: raz - -\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}} -\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}} -\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}} - -\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosecttoc} - -\def\dosectlof@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosectlof} - -\def\dosectlot@[#1]{% -\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosectlot} - -\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} - -\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\STC@list{#2}% - \STC@loop{#1}} -\def\STC@toc{% - \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi} - -\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax - \stepcounter{stc}% % the stc counter simulates the section counter - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% % UNIX -\def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% % MS-DOS -\def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .stcN .stc->.S on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname % open next .stcN (.stc->.S if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSSfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSSSfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcPfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSPfont - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -% Added v25: \starsection and co. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax - \stepcounter{stc}% % the stc counter simulates the section counter - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% % UNIX -\def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% % MS-DOS -\def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .stcN .stc->.S on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname % open next .stcN (.stc->.S if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSSfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand \leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSSSfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSSSfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcPfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\stcSPfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\stcSPfont - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\} -\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JSECTTOCS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\STC@toc - \else - \typeout{PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\STC@read\fi} -\def\STC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line - \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line....\STC@% - }% -\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5\STC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend % \section* closes .stcN (.stc->.S on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% % \section* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc - \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}% - -\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\SLF@list{#2}% - \SLF@loop{#1}} -\def\SLF@lof{% - \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi} - -\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect\relax - \stepcounter{stc}% % the stc counter simulates the section counter - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}% % UNIX -\def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.G\thestc}% % MS-DOS -\def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .slfN .slf->.H on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname % open next .slfN (.slf->.H if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for sections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\slffont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\slffont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\} -\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JSECTLOFS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\SLF@lof - \else - \typeout{PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\SLF@read\fi} -\def\SLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line - \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line....\SLF@% - }% -\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5\SLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend % \section* closes .slfN (.slf->.H on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% % \section* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof - \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}% - -\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\SLT@list{#2}% - \SLT@loop{#1}} -\def\SLT@lot{% - \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi} - -\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect\relax - \stepcounter{stc}% % the stc counter simulates the section counter - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} -\@ifundefined{SHORTEXT}% -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}% % UNIX -\def\mltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}}% % UNIX -{\typeout{Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}% % MS-DOS -\def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}}% % MS-DOS - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc % close current .sltN .slt->.V on MS-DOS - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname % open next .sltN (.slt->.V if MS-DOS) - \fi -\expandafter% % extracts and writes info for subsections, etc. - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table\relax - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\tf@mtc {% - {\string\reset@font\string\sltfont\string\mtc@string% - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\noexpand\the\mtc@toks}{\string\reset@font\string\sltfont% - \space #3}}}}\@tempa - \fi -} - -\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\} -\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \typeout{^^JNo file #1^^JSECTLOTS NOT PREPARED.^^J}% - \expandafter\SLT@lot - \else - \typeout{PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\SLT@read\fi} -\def\SLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line - \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line....\SLT@% - }% -\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5\SLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend % \section* closes .sltN (.slt->.V on MS-DOS) - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.bmt % and opens a scratch file - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% % \section* has done a parasite increment - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot - \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}% -}}{} - -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section} %v27 -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter} %v27 -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} -\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} -\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} -\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} -\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} - -\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax} -\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax} -\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax} -\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} % the \hrule is .4pt high -\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} % the \hrule is .4pt high -\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@% - \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} % the \hrule is .4pt high - -%%%% Language dependent part -\DeclareOption{american}{\input{english.mld}} -\DeclareOption{austrian}{\input{german.mld}} -\DeclareOption{brazil}{\input{portuges.mld}} -\DeclareOption{breton}{\input{breton.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{catalan}{\input{catalan.mld}} -\DeclareOption{croatian}{\input{croatian.mld}} -\DeclareOption{czech}{\input{czech.mld}} -\DeclareOption{danish}{\input{danish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{dutch}{\input{dutch.mld}} -\DeclareOption{english}{\input{english.mld}} -\DeclareOption{esperant}{\input{esperant.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\input{esperant.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{finnish}{\input{finnish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{francais}{\input{french.mld}} -\DeclareOption{french}{\input{french.mld}} -\DeclareOption{galician}{\input{galician.mld}} -\DeclareOption{german}{\input{german.mld}} -\DeclareOption{germanb}{\input{germanb.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{greek}{\input{greek.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\input{magyar.mld}} -\DeclareOption{irish}{\input{irish.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{italian}{\input{italian.mld}} -\DeclareOption{lsorbian}{\input{lsorbian.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{magyar}{\input{magyar.mld}} -\DeclareOption{norsk}{\input{norsk.mld}} -\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\input{nynorsk.mld}} %v25 -\DeclareOption{polish}{\input{polish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{portuges}{\input{portuges.mld}} -\DeclareOption{romanian}{\input{romanian.mld}} -%%%%russian not supported \DeclareOption{russian}{\input{russian.mld}} -\DeclareOption{russianb}{\input{russianb.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{scottish}{\input{scottish.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{slovak}{\input{slovak.mld}} -\DeclareOption{slovene}{\input{slovene.mld}} -\DeclareOption{spanish}{\input{spanish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{swedish}{\input{swedish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{turkish}{\input{turkish.mld}} -\DeclareOption{usorbian}{\input{usorbian.mld}} %v26 -\DeclareOption{vietnam}{\input{vietnam.mld}} %v27 -\DeclareOption{vietnamese}{\input{vietnam.mld}} %v27 -\DeclareOption{arab}{\input{arab.mld}} %v27 -\DeclareOption{arabic}{\input{arab.mld}} %v27 -\ExecuteOptions{english} %v27 % default -\ProcessOptions* -%%\languagespecific{russian.dtx} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `minitoc.sty'. +% Copyright 2020 LaTeX3 Project +% Licence LPPL: https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c.txt +\ProvidesPackage{minitoc-hyper}[2020/01/14] +\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc-hyper}{% +This package is obsolete,\MessageBreak +please use minitoc instead} +\RequirePackage{minitoc} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty index 39f275e642b..cafbe62ee83 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ %% 2000 Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019- The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nohyperref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nohyperref.sty index a60e117d13b..35de390e72f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nohyperref.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nohyperref.sty @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `nohyperref') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ %% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] \ProvidesPackage{nohyperref} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Dummy hyperref (SR)] \RequirePackage{letltxmacro}[2008/06/13] \let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def index d2bee8d2c3f..7e751022bb6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `pd1enc') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{pd1enc.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref: PDFDocEncoding definition (HO)] \DeclareFontEncoding{PD1}{}{} \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{PD1}{\textasciigrave} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def index be4e752f5ed..8d465e25e76 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `pdfmark,pdfmarkbase,pdfform,outlines') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{pdfmark.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref definitions for pdfmark specials] \Hy@VersionCheck{pdfmark.def} \begingroup @@ -1362,7 +1363,7 @@ } \def\PDFForm@@Name#1{% \begingroup - \ifnum\Hy@pdfversion<5 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 + \ifnum\Hy@pdf@majorminor@version<105 % implementation note 117, PDF spec 1.7 \ifHy@unicode \Hy@unicodefalse \fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/psdextra.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/psdextra.def index 9548445d56b..a2f2956d84f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/psdextra.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/psdextra.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `psdextra') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{psdextra.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref: Additions to PDF string support] \Hy@VersionCheck{psdextra.def} \newcommand*{\psdmapshortnames}{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puarenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puarenc.def index b72acfbcfed..a127d3460a6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puarenc.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puarenc.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `puarenc') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{puarenc.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref: Additions to puenc.def for Arabi] \DeclareTextCommand{\hamza}{PU}{\86\041}% U+0621 \DeclareTextCommand{\alefmadda}{PU}{\86\042}% U+0622 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puenc.def index 9e36d302342..79a43228156 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puenc.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puenc.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `puenc') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{puenc.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref: PDF Unicode definition (HO)] \DeclareFontEncoding{PU}{}{} \DeclareTextCommand{\`}{PU}[1]{#1\83\000}% U+0300 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puvnenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puvnenc.def index f9165888c05..da0483077ee 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puvnenc.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/puvnenc.def @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ %% %% hyperref.dtx (with options: `puvnenc') %% -%% File: hyperref.dtx Copyright 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, -%% with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, -%% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019 LaTeX3 Project +%% File: hyperref.dtx +%% Copyright +%% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, +%% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. +%% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group +%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.txt'. %% \ProvidesFile{puvnenc.def} - [2019/11/10 v7.00c % + [2020/01/14 v7.00d % Hyperref: Additions to puenc.def for VnTeX] \DeclareTextCommand{\abreve}{PU}{\81\003}% U+0103 \DeclareTextCommand{\acircumflex}{PU}{\80\342}% U+00E2 -- cgit v1.2.3